mirror of
https://github.com/isc-projects/bind9.git
synced 2026-03-01 21:10:55 -05:00
Denote all command line options using semantic markup (.. option::)
The markup allows referencing individual options, and also makes them
more legible (no more thin red text on gray background).
Most of the work was done using regexes:
s/^``-\(.*\)``$/.. option:: -\1\r/
s/^``+\(.*\)``$/.. option:: +\1\r/
on bin/**/*.rst files along with visual inspection and hand-edits,
mostly for positional arguments.
Regex for rndc.rst:
s/^``\(.*\)``/.. option:: \1\r/
+ hand edits to remove extra asterisk and whitespace here and there.
(cherry picked from commit ec30944aa4)
This commit is contained in:
parent
ed7c208616
commit
b4e46de257
52 changed files with 2761 additions and 1139 deletions
|
|
@ -38,37 +38,46 @@ However, ``named-checkconf`` can be run on these files explicitly.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the usage summary and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-j``
|
||||
.. option:: -j
|
||||
|
||||
When loading a zonefile, this option instructs ``named`` to read the journal if it exists.
|
||||
|
||||
``-l``
|
||||
.. option:: -l
|
||||
|
||||
This option lists all the configured zones. Each line of output contains the zone
|
||||
name, class (e.g. IN), view, and type (e.g. primary or secondary).
|
||||
|
||||
``-c``
|
||||
.. option:: -c
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies that only the "core" configuration should be checked. This suppresses the loading of
|
||||
plugin modules, and causes all parameters to ``plugin`` statements to
|
||||
be ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i``
|
||||
.. option:: -i
|
||||
|
||||
This option ignores warnings on deprecated options.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p``
|
||||
.. option:: -p
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints out the ``named.conf`` and included files in canonical form if
|
||||
no errors were detected. See also the ``-x`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -t directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option instructs ``named`` to chroot to ``directory``, so that ``include`` directives in the
|
||||
configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
|
||||
``named``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the version of the ``named-checkconf`` program and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x``
|
||||
.. option:: -x
|
||||
|
||||
When printing the configuration files in canonical form, this option obscures
|
||||
shared secrets by replacing them with strings of question marks
|
||||
(``?``). This allows the contents of ``named.conf`` and related files
|
||||
|
|
@ -76,10 +85,12 @@ Options
|
|||
without compromising private data. This option cannot be used without
|
||||
``-p``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-z``
|
||||
.. option:: -z
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs a test load of all zones of type ``primary`` found in ``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``filename``
|
||||
.. option:: filename
|
||||
|
||||
This indicates the name of the configuration file to be checked. If not specified,
|
||||
it defaults to |named_conf|.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -34,32 +34,40 @@ configuring them into a name server.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-d``
|
||||
.. option:: -d
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the usage summary and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which only sets an exit code to indicate
|
||||
successful or failed completion.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the version of the ``named-checkzone`` program and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-j``
|
||||
.. option:: -j
|
||||
|
||||
When loading a zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal if it exists. The journal
|
||||
file name is assumed to be the zone file name with the
|
||||
string ``.jnl`` appended.
|
||||
|
||||
``-J filename``
|
||||
.. option:: -J filename
|
||||
|
||||
When loading the zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal from the given file, if
|
||||
it exists. This implies ``-j``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the class of the zone. If not specified, ``IN`` is assumed.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -i mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs post-load zone integrity checks. Possible modes are
|
||||
``full`` (the default), ``full-sibling``, ``local``,
|
||||
``local-sibling``, and ``none``.
|
||||
|
|
@ -85,11 +93,13 @@ Options
|
|||
|
||||
Mode ``none`` disables the checks.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f format``
|
||||
.. option:: -f format
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the zone file. Possible formats are
|
||||
``text`` (the default), and ``raw``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-F format``
|
||||
.. option:: -F format
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the output file specified. For
|
||||
``named-checkzone``, this does not have any effect unless it dumps
|
||||
the zone contents.
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,43 +111,52 @@ Options
|
|||
0, the raw file can be read by any version of ``named``; if N is 1, the
|
||||
file can only be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -k mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs ``check-names`` checks with the specified failure mode.
|
||||
Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-l ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -l ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file. Any record with a
|
||||
TTL higher than this value causes the zone to be rejected. This
|
||||
is similar to using the ``max-zone-ttl`` option in ``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L serial``
|
||||
.. option:: -L serial
|
||||
|
||||
When compiling a zone to ``raw`` format, this option sets the "source
|
||||
serial" value in the header to the specified serial number. This is
|
||||
expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.
|
||||
|
||||
``-m mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -m mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies whether MX records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and
|
||||
``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-M mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -M mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks whether a MX record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-n mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -n mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies whether NS records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-o filename``
|
||||
.. option:: -o filename
|
||||
|
||||
This option writes the zone output to ``filename``. If ``filename`` is ``-``, then
|
||||
the zone output is written to standard output.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -r mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are
|
||||
semantically equal in plain DNS. Possible modes are ``fail``,
|
||||
``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s style``
|
||||
.. option:: -s style
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the style of the dumped zone file. Possible styles are
|
||||
``full`` (the default) and ``relative``. The ``full`` format is most
|
||||
suitable for processing automatically by a separate script.
|
||||
|
|
@ -146,38 +165,46 @@ Options
|
|||
the zone contents. It also does not have any meaning if the output format
|
||||
is not text.
|
||||
|
||||
``-S mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -S mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks whether an SRV record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -t directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to chroot to ``directory``, so that ``include`` directives in the
|
||||
configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
|
||||
``named``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -T mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks whether Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a
|
||||
warning if an SPF-formatted TXT record is not also present. Possible
|
||||
modes are ``warn`` (the default) and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-w directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -w directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option instructs ``named`` to chdir to ``directory``, so that relative filenames in master file
|
||||
``$INCLUDE`` directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
|
||||
``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D``
|
||||
.. option:: -D
|
||||
|
||||
This option dumps the zone file in canonical format.
|
||||
|
||||
``-W mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -W mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies whether to check for non-terminal wildcards. Non-terminal
|
||||
wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the
|
||||
wildcard matching algorithm (:rfc:`4592`). Possible modes are ``warn``
|
||||
(the default) and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``zonename``
|
||||
.. option:: zonename
|
||||
|
||||
This indicates the domain name of the zone being checked.
|
||||
|
||||
``filename``
|
||||
.. option:: filename
|
||||
|
||||
This is the name of the zone file.
|
||||
|
||||
Return Values
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -36,32 +36,40 @@ strict as those specified in the ``named`` configuration file.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-d``
|
||||
.. option:: -d
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the usage summary and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which only sets an exit code to indicate
|
||||
successful or failed completion.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the version of the ``named-checkzone`` program and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-j``
|
||||
.. option:: -j
|
||||
|
||||
When loading a zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal if it exists. The journal
|
||||
file name is assumed to be the zone file name with the
|
||||
string ``.jnl`` appended.
|
||||
|
||||
``-J filename``
|
||||
.. option:: -J filename
|
||||
|
||||
When loading the zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal from the given file, if
|
||||
it exists. This implies ``-j``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the class of the zone. If not specified, ``IN`` is assumed.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -i mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs post-load zone integrity checks. Possible modes are
|
||||
``full`` (the default), ``full-sibling``, ``local``,
|
||||
``local-sibling``, and ``none``.
|
||||
|
|
@ -87,11 +95,13 @@ Options
|
|||
|
||||
Mode ``none`` disables the checks.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f format``
|
||||
.. option:: -f format
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the zone file. Possible formats are
|
||||
``text`` (the default), and ``raw``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-F format``
|
||||
.. option:: -F format
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the output file specified. For
|
||||
``named-checkzone``, this does not have any effect unless it dumps
|
||||
the zone contents.
|
||||
|
|
@ -103,83 +113,100 @@ Options
|
|||
0, the raw file can be read by any version of ``named``; if N is 1, the
|
||||
file can only be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -k mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs ``check-names`` checks with the specified failure mode.
|
||||
Possible modes are ``fail`` (the default), ``warn``, and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-l ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -l ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file. Any record with a
|
||||
TTL higher than this value causes the zone to be rejected. This
|
||||
is similar to using the ``max-zone-ttl`` option in ``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L serial``
|
||||
.. option:: -L serial
|
||||
|
||||
When compiling a zone to ``raw`` format, this option sets the "source
|
||||
serial" value in the header to the specified serial number. This is
|
||||
expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.
|
||||
|
||||
``-m mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -m mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies whether MX records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and
|
||||
``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-M mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -M mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks whether a MX record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-n mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -n mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies whether NS records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are ``fail`` (the default), ``warn``, and
|
||||
``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-o filename``
|
||||
.. option:: -o filename
|
||||
|
||||
This option writes the zone output to ``filename``. If ``filename`` is ``-``, then
|
||||
the zone output is written to standard output. This is mandatory for ``named-compilezone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -r mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are
|
||||
semantically equal in plain DNS. Possible modes are ``fail``,
|
||||
``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s style``
|
||||
.. option:: -s style
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the style of the dumped zone file. Possible styles are
|
||||
``full`` (the default) and ``relative``. The ``full`` format is most
|
||||
suitable for processing automatically by a separate script.
|
||||
The relative format is more human-readable and is thus
|
||||
suitable for editing by hand.
|
||||
|
||||
``-S mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -S mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks whether an SRV record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -t directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to chroot to ``directory``, so that ``include`` directives in the
|
||||
configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
|
||||
``named``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -T mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option checks whether Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a
|
||||
warning if an SPF-formatted TXT record is not also present. Possible
|
||||
modes are ``warn`` (the default) and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-w directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -w directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option instructs ``named`` to chdir to ``directory``, so that relative filenames in master file
|
||||
``$INCLUDE`` directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
|
||||
``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D``
|
||||
.. option:: -D
|
||||
|
||||
This option dumps the zone file in canonical format. This is always enabled for
|
||||
``named-compilezone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-W mode``
|
||||
.. option:: -W mode
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies whether to check for non-terminal wildcards. Non-terminal
|
||||
wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the
|
||||
wildcard matching algorithm (:rfc:`4592`). Possible modes are ``warn``
|
||||
(the default) and ``ignore``.
|
||||
|
||||
``zonename``
|
||||
.. option:: zonename
|
||||
|
||||
This indicates the domain name of the zone being checked.
|
||||
|
||||
``filename``
|
||||
.. option:: filename
|
||||
|
||||
This is the name of the zone file.
|
||||
|
||||
Return Values
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -45,16 +45,19 @@ be used from a remote system.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -a algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available
|
||||
choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384,
|
||||
and hmac-sha512. The default is hmac-sha256. Options are
|
||||
case-insensitive, and the "hmac-" prefix may be omitted.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of options and arguments.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k keyname``
|
||||
.. option:: -k keyname
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the key name of the DDNS authentication key. The
|
||||
default is ``ddns-key`` when neither the ``-s`` nor ``-z`` option is
|
||||
specified; otherwise, the default is ``ddns-key`` as a separate label
|
||||
|
|
@ -62,12 +65,14 @@ Options
|
|||
The key name must have the format of a valid domain name, consisting of
|
||||
letters, digits, hyphens, and periods.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables quiet mode, which prints only the key, with no
|
||||
explanatory text or usage examples. This is essentially identical to
|
||||
``tsig-keygen``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s name``
|
||||
.. option:: -s name
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates a configuration example to allow dynamic updates
|
||||
of a single hostname. The example ``named.conf`` text shows how to set
|
||||
an update policy for the specified name using the "name" nametype. The
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,7 +80,8 @@ Options
|
|||
cannot be used, since the name to be updated may differ from the key
|
||||
name. This option cannot be used with the ``-z`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-z zone``
|
||||
.. option:: -z zone
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates a configuration example to allow
|
||||
dynamic updates of a zone. The example ``named.conf`` text shows how
|
||||
to set an update policy for the specified zone using the "zonesub"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -34,7 +34,8 @@ by hand. Alternatively, it can be run with the ``-a`` option to set up a
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a``
|
||||
.. option:: -a
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets automatic ``rndc`` configuration, which creates a file
|
||||
|rndc_key| that is read by both ``rndc`` and ``named`` on startup.
|
||||
The ``rndc.key`` file defines a default command channel and
|
||||
|
|
@ -46,46 +47,56 @@ Options
|
|||
remotely, run ``rndc-confgen`` without the ``-a`` option
|
||||
and set up ``rndc.conf`` and ``named.conf`` as directed.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -A algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available choices
|
||||
are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384, and
|
||||
hmac-sha512. The default is hmac-sha256.
|
||||
|
||||
``-b keysize``
|
||||
.. option:: -b keysize
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the size of the authentication key in bits. The size must be between
|
||||
1 and 512 bits; the default is the hash size.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c keyfile``
|
||||
.. option:: -c keyfile
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used with the ``-a`` option to specify an alternate location for
|
||||
``rndc.key``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
``rndc-confgen``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k keyname``
|
||||
.. option:: -k keyname
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the key name of the ``rndc`` authentication key. This must be a
|
||||
valid domain name. The default is ``rndc-key``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the command channel port where ``named`` listens for
|
||||
connections from ``rndc``. The default is 953.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option prevets printing the written path in automatic configuration mode.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s address``
|
||||
.. option:: -s address
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the IP address where ``named`` listens for command-channel
|
||||
connections from ``rndc``. The default is the loopback address
|
||||
127.0.0.1.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t chrootdir``
|
||||
.. option:: -t chrootdir
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used with the ``-a`` option to specify a directory where ``named``
|
||||
runs chrooted. An additional copy of the ``rndc.key`` is
|
||||
written relative to this directory, so that it is found by the
|
||||
chrooted ``named``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u user``
|
||||
.. option:: -u user
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used with the ``-a`` option to set the owner of the generated ``rndc.key`` file.
|
||||
If ``-t`` is also specified, only the file in the chroot
|
||||
area has its owner changed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -35,13 +35,15 @@ of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is ``tsig-key``.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -a algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available
|
||||
choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384,
|
||||
and hmac-sha512. The default is hmac-sha256. Options are
|
||||
case-insensitive, and the "hmac-" prefix may be omitted.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of options and arguments.
|
||||
|
||||
See Also
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -68,7 +68,8 @@ A typical invocation of ``delv`` looks like:
|
|||
|
||||
where:
|
||||
|
||||
``server``
|
||||
.. option:: server
|
||||
|
||||
is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an
|
||||
IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in
|
||||
colon-delimited notation. When the supplied ``server`` argument is a
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,10 +85,12 @@ where:
|
|||
sends queries to the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4, ::1
|
||||
for IPv6).
|
||||
|
||||
``name``
|
||||
.. option:: name
|
||||
|
||||
is the domain name to be looked up.
|
||||
|
||||
``type``
|
||||
.. option:: type
|
||||
|
||||
indicates what type of query is required - ANY, A, MX, etc.
|
||||
``type`` can be any valid query type. If no ``type`` argument is
|
||||
supplied, ``delv`` performs a lookup for an A record.
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,7 +98,8 @@ where:
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a anchor-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -a anchor-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a file from which to read DNSSEC trust anchors. The default
|
||||
is |bind_keys|, which is included with BIND 9 and contains one
|
||||
or more trust anchors for the root zone (".").
|
||||
|
|
@ -111,27 +115,32 @@ Options
|
|||
revoked and rolled over, |bind_keys| must be updated to
|
||||
use DNSSEC validation in ``delv``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-b address``
|
||||
.. option:: -b address
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the source IP address of the query to ``address``. This must be
|
||||
a valid address on one of the host's network interfaces, or ``0.0.0.0``,
|
||||
or ``::``. An optional source port may be specified by appending
|
||||
``#<port>``
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the query class for the requested data. Currently, only class
|
||||
"IN" is supported in ``delv`` and any other value is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d level``
|
||||
.. option:: -d level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the systemwide debug level to ``level``. The allowed range is
|
||||
from 0 to 99. The default is 0 (no debugging). Debugging traces from
|
||||
``delv`` become more verbose as the debug level increases. See the
|
||||
``+mtrace``, ``+rtrace``, and ``+vtrace`` options below for
|
||||
additional debugging details.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays the ``delv`` help usage output and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i``
|
||||
.. option:: -i
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets insecure mode, which disables internal DNSSEC validation. (Note,
|
||||
however, that this does not set the CD bit on upstream queries. If the
|
||||
server being queried is performing DNSSEC validation, then it does
|
||||
|
|
@ -139,23 +148,27 @@ Options
|
|||
is necessary to examine invalid data to debug a DNSSEC problem, use
|
||||
``dig +cd``.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-m``
|
||||
.. option:: -m
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables memory usage debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port#``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port#
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a destination port to use for queries, instead of the
|
||||
standard DNS port number 53. This option is used with a name
|
||||
server that has been configured to listen for queries on a
|
||||
non-standard port number.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q name``
|
||||
.. option:: -q name
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the query name to ``name``. While the query name can be
|
||||
specified without using the ``-q`` option, it is sometimes necessary to
|
||||
disambiguate names from types or classes (for example, when looking
|
||||
up the name "ns", which could be misinterpreted as the type NS, or
|
||||
"ch", which could be misinterpreted as class CH).
|
||||
|
||||
``-t type``
|
||||
.. option:: -t type
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the query type to ``type``, which can be any valid query type
|
||||
supported in BIND 9 except for zone transfer types AXFR and IXFR. As
|
||||
with ``-q``, this is useful to distinguish query-name types or classes
|
||||
|
|
@ -165,10 +178,12 @@ Options
|
|||
The default query type is "A", unless the ``-x`` option is supplied
|
||||
to indicate a reverse lookup, in which case it is "PTR".
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the ``delv`` version and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x addr``
|
||||
.. option:: -x addr
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs a reverse lookup, mapping an address to a name. ``addr``
|
||||
is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited
|
||||
IPv6 address. When ``-x`` is used, there is no need to provide the
|
||||
|
|
@ -177,10 +192,12 @@ Options
|
|||
query type to PTR. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format
|
||||
under the IP6.ARPA domain.
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option forces ``delv`` to only use IPv4.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option forces ``delv`` to only use IPv6.
|
||||
|
||||
Query Options
|
||||
|
|
@ -195,7 +212,8 @@ the string ``no`` to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other keywords
|
|||
assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
||||
``+keyword=value``. The query options are:
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cdflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cdflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option controls whether to set the CD (checking disabled) bit in queries
|
||||
sent by ``delv``. This may be useful when troubleshooting DNSSEC
|
||||
problems from behind a validating resolver. A validating resolver
|
||||
|
|
@ -204,15 +222,18 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
to return invalid responses, which ``delv`` can then validate
|
||||
internally and report the errors in detail.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]class``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]class
|
||||
|
||||
This option controls whether to display the CLASS when printing a record. The
|
||||
default is to display the CLASS.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option controls whether to display the TTL when printing a record. The
|
||||
default is to display the TTL.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]rtrace``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]rtrace
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles resolver fetch logging. This reports the name and type of each
|
||||
query sent by ``delv`` in the process of carrying out the resolution
|
||||
and validation process, including the original query
|
||||
|
|
@ -224,7 +245,8 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
``-d`` option produces the same output, but affects other
|
||||
logging categories as well.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]mtrace``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]mtrace
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles message logging. This produces a detailed dump of the
|
||||
responses received by ``delv`` in the process of carrying out the
|
||||
resolution and validation process.
|
||||
|
|
@ -234,7 +256,8 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
debug level to 10 using the ``-d`` option produces the same
|
||||
output, but affects other logging categories as well.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]vtrace``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]vtrace
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles validation logging. This shows the internal process of the
|
||||
validator as it determines whether an answer is validly signed,
|
||||
unsigned, or invalid.
|
||||
|
|
@ -244,20 +267,24 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
systemwide debug level to 3 using the ``-d`` option produces the
|
||||
same output, but affects other logging categories as well.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]short``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]short
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles between verbose and terse answers. The default is to print the answer in a
|
||||
verbose form.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]comments``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]comments
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
|
||||
print comments.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]rrcomments``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]rrcomments
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of per-record comments in the output (for example,
|
||||
human-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
|
||||
to print per-record comments.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]crypto``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]crypto
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
|
||||
contents of these fields are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
|
||||
validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
|
||||
|
|
@ -265,28 +292,33 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
they are replaced by the string ``[omitted]`` or, in the DNSKEY case, the
|
||||
key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g. ``[ key id = value ]``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]trust``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]trust
|
||||
|
||||
This option controls whether to display the trust level when printing a record.
|
||||
The default is to display the trust level.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]split[=W]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]split[=W]
|
||||
|
||||
This option splits long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource records into
|
||||
chunks of ``W`` characters (where ``W`` is rounded up to the nearest
|
||||
multiple of 4). ``+nosplit`` or ``+split=0`` causes fields not to be
|
||||
split at all. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
|
||||
multiline mode is active.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]all``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]all
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets or clears the display options ``+[no]comments``,
|
||||
``+[no]rrcomments``, and ``+[no]trust`` as a group.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]multiline``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]multiline
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints long records (such as RRSIG, DNSKEY, and SOA records) in a
|
||||
verbose multi-line format with human-readable comments. The default
|
||||
is to print each record on a single line, to facilitate machine
|
||||
parsing of the ``delv`` output.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]dnssec``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]dnssec
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates whether to display RRSIG records in the ``delv`` output.
|
||||
The default is to do so. Note that (unlike in ``dig``) this does
|
||||
*not* control whether to request DNSSEC records or to
|
||||
|
|
@ -294,23 +326,27 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
always occurs unless suppressed by the use of ``-i`` or
|
||||
``+noroot``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]root[=ROOT]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]root[=ROOT]
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates whether to perform conventional DNSSEC validation, and if so,
|
||||
specifies the name of a trust anchor. The default is to validate using a
|
||||
trust anchor of "." (the root zone), for which there is a built-in key. If
|
||||
specifying a different trust anchor, then ``-a`` must be used to specify a
|
||||
file containing the key.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]tcp``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]tcp
|
||||
|
||||
This option controls whether to use TCP when sending queries. The default is to
|
||||
use UDP unless a truncated response has been received.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]unknownformat``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]unknownformat
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints all RDATA in unknown RR-type presentation format (:rfc:`3597`).
|
||||
The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type's
|
||||
presentation format.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]yaml``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]yaml
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints response data in YAML format.
|
||||
|
||||
Files
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
285
bin/dig/dig.rst
285
bin/dig/dig.rst
|
|
@ -69,7 +69,8 @@ A typical invocation of ``dig`` looks like:
|
|||
|
||||
where:
|
||||
|
||||
``server``
|
||||
.. option:: server
|
||||
|
||||
is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an
|
||||
IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in
|
||||
colon-delimited notation. When the supplied ``server`` argument is a
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,10 +85,12 @@ where:
|
|||
sends the query to the local host. The reply from the name server
|
||||
that responds is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
``name``
|
||||
.. option:: name
|
||||
|
||||
is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
|
||||
|
||||
``type``
|
||||
.. option:: type
|
||||
|
||||
indicates what type of query is required - ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
|
||||
``type`` can be any valid query type. If no ``type`` argument is
|
||||
supplied, ``dig`` performs a lookup for an A record.
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,28 +98,34 @@ where:
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that only IPv4 should be used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that only IPv6 should be used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-b address[#port]``
|
||||
.. option:: -b address[#port]
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the source IP address of the query. The ``address`` must be a
|
||||
valid address on one of the host's network interfaces, or "0.0.0.0"
|
||||
or "::". An optional port may be specified by appending ``#port``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the query class. The default ``class`` is IN; other classes are
|
||||
HS for Hesiod records or CH for Chaosnet records.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f file``
|
||||
.. option:: -f file
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets batch mode, in which ``dig`` reads a list of lookup requests to process from
|
||||
the given ``file``. Each line in the file should be organized in the
|
||||
same way it would be presented as a query to ``dig`` using the
|
||||
command-line interface.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k keyfile``
|
||||
.. option:: -k keyfile
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to sign queries using TSIG using a key read from the given file. Key
|
||||
files can be generated using ``tsig-keygen``. When using TSIG
|
||||
authentication with ``dig``, the name server that is queried needs to
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,24 +133,29 @@ Options
|
|||
by providing appropriate ``key`` and ``server`` statements in
|
||||
``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-m``
|
||||
.. option:: -m
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables memory usage debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port
|
||||
|
||||
This option sends the query to a non-standard port on the server, instead of the
|
||||
default port 53. This option is used to test a name server that
|
||||
has been configured to listen for queries on a non-standard port
|
||||
number.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q name``
|
||||
.. option:: -q name
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the domain name to query. This is useful to distinguish the ``name``
|
||||
from other arguments.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r``
|
||||
.. option:: -r
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that options from ``${HOME}/.digrc`` should not be read. This is useful for
|
||||
scripts that need predictable behavior.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t type``
|
||||
.. option:: -t type
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the resource record type to query, which can be any valid query type. If
|
||||
it is a resource record type supported in BIND 9, it can be given by
|
||||
the type mnemonic (such as ``NS`` or ``AAAA``). The default query type is
|
||||
|
|
@ -156,13 +170,16 @@ Options
|
|||
the number of the type. If the resource record type is not supported
|
||||
in BIND 9, the result is displayed as described in :rfc:`3597`.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u``
|
||||
.. option:: -u
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that print query times should be provided in microseconds instead of milliseconds.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the version number and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x addr``
|
||||
.. option:: -x addr
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets simplified reverse lookups, for mapping addresses to names. The
|
||||
``addr`` is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation, or a
|
||||
colon-delimited IPv6 address. When the ``-x`` option is used, there is no
|
||||
|
|
@ -172,7 +189,8 @@ Options
|
|||
and IN respectively. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format
|
||||
under the IP6.ARPA domain.
|
||||
|
||||
``-y [hmac:]keyname:secret``
|
||||
.. option:: -y [hmac:]keyname:secret
|
||||
|
||||
This option signs queries using TSIG with the given authentication key.
|
||||
``keyname`` is the name of the key, and ``secret`` is the
|
||||
base64-encoded shared secret. ``hmac`` is the name of the key algorithm;
|
||||
|
|
@ -203,17 +221,21 @@ assign values to options, like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
||||
``+cdflag``. The query options are:
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]aaflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]aaflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option is a synonym for ``+[no]aaonly``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]aaonly``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]aaonly
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the ``aa`` flag in the query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]additional``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]additional
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the additional section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]adflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]adflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to return whether all of the answer and authority
|
||||
sections have been validated as secure, according to the security
|
||||
|
|
@ -222,44 +244,54 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
indicates that some part of the answer was insecure or not validated.
|
||||
This bit is set by default.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]all``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]all
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets or clears all display flags.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]answer``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]answer
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
|
||||
is to display it.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]authority``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]authority
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the authority section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]badcookie``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]badcookie
|
||||
|
||||
This option retries the lookup with a new server cookie if a BADCOOKIE response is
|
||||
received.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]besteffort``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]besteffort
|
||||
|
||||
This option attempts to display the contents of messages which are malformed. The
|
||||
default is to not display malformed answers.
|
||||
|
||||
``+bufsize[=B]``
|
||||
.. option:: +bufsize[=B]
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
|
||||
``B`` bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are 65535 and
|
||||
0, respectively. ``+bufsize`` restores the default buffer size.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cdflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cdflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]class``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]class
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cmd``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cmd
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output, identifying the
|
||||
version of ``dig`` and the query options that have been applied. This option
|
||||
always has a global effect; it cannot be set globally and then overridden on a
|
||||
per-lookup basis. The default is to print this comment.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]comments``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]comments
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of some comment lines in the output, with
|
||||
information about the packet header and OPT pseudosection, and the names of
|
||||
the response section. The default is to print these comments.
|
||||
|
|
@ -268,7 +300,8 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
can be controlled using other command-line switches. These include
|
||||
``+[no]cmd``, ``+[no]question``, ``+[no]stats``, and ``+[no]rrcomments``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cookie=####``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cookie=####
|
||||
|
||||
This option sends [or does not send] a COOKIE EDNS option, with an optional value. Replaying a COOKIE
|
||||
from a previous response allows the server to identify a previous
|
||||
client. The default is ``+cookie``.
|
||||
|
|
@ -276,7 +309,8 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
``+cookie`` is also set when ``+trace`` is set to better emulate the
|
||||
default queries from a nameserver.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]crypto``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]crypto
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
|
||||
contents of these fields are unnecessary for debugging most DNSSEC
|
||||
validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
|
||||
|
|
@ -284,62 +318,75 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
they are replaced by the string ``[omitted]`` or, in the DNSKEY case, the
|
||||
key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g. ``[ key id = value ]``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]defname``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]defname
|
||||
|
||||
This option, which is deprecated, is treated as a synonym for ``+[no]search``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]dns64prefix``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]dns64prefix
|
||||
|
||||
Lookup IPV4ONLY.ARPA AAAA and print any DNS64 prefixes found.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]dnssec``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]dnssec
|
||||
|
||||
This option requests that DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK (DO) bit in
|
||||
the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+domain=somename``
|
||||
.. option:: +domain=somename
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the search list to contain the single domain ``somename``, as if
|
||||
specified in a ``domain`` directive in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, and
|
||||
enables search list processing as if the ``+search`` option were
|
||||
given.
|
||||
|
||||
``+dscp=value``
|
||||
.. option:: +dscp=value
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the DSCP code point to be used when sending the query. Valid DSCP
|
||||
code points are in the range [0...63]. By default no code point is
|
||||
explicitly set.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]edns[=#]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]edns[=#]
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the EDNS version to query with. Valid values are 0 to 255.
|
||||
Setting the EDNS version causes an EDNS query to be sent.
|
||||
``+noedns`` clears the remembered EDNS version. EDNS is set to 0 by
|
||||
default.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ednsflags[=#]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ednsflags[=#]
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the must-be-zero EDNS flags bits (Z bits) to the specified value.
|
||||
Decimal, hex, and octal encodings are accepted. Setting a named flag
|
||||
(e.g., DO) is silently ignored. By default, no Z bits are set.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ednsnegotiation``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ednsnegotiation
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables/disables EDNS version negotiation. By default, EDNS version
|
||||
negotiation is enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the EDNS option with code point ``code`` and an optional payload
|
||||
of ``value`` as a hexadecimal string. ``code`` can be either an EDNS
|
||||
option name (for example, ``NSID`` or ``ECS``) or an arbitrary
|
||||
numeric value. ``+noednsopt`` clears the EDNS options to be sent.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]expire``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]expire
|
||||
|
||||
This option sends an EDNS Expire option.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]fail``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]fail
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that ``named`` should try [or not try] the next server if a SERVFAIL is received. The default is
|
||||
to not try the next server, which is the reverse of normal stub
|
||||
resolver behavior.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]header-only``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]header-only
|
||||
|
||||
This option sends a query with a DNS header without a question section. The
|
||||
default is to add a question section. The query type and query name
|
||||
are ignored when this is set.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]https[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]https[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates whether to use DNS over HTTPS (DoH) when querying
|
||||
name servers. When this option is in use, the port number defaults to 443.
|
||||
The HTTP POST request mode is used when sending the query.
|
||||
|
|
@ -348,31 +395,38 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
query URI; the default is ``/dns-query``. So, for example, ``dig
|
||||
@example.com +https`` will use the URI ``https://example.com/dns-query``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]https-get[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]https-get[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
Similar to ``+https``, except that the HTTP GET request mode is used
|
||||
when sending the query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]https-post[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]https-post[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
Same as ``+https``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]http-plain[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]http-plain[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
Similar to ``+https``, except that HTTP queries will be sent over a
|
||||
non-encrypted channel. When this option is in use, the port number
|
||||
defaults to 80 and the HTTP request mode is POST.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]http-plain-get[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]http-plain-get[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
Similar to ``+http-plain``, except that the HTTP request mode is GET.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]http-plain-post[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]http-plain-post[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
Same as ``+http-plain``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]identify``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]identify
|
||||
|
||||
This option shows [or does not show] the IP address and port number that
|
||||
supplied the answer, when the ``+short`` option is enabled. If short
|
||||
form answers are requested, the default is not to show the source
|
||||
address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]idnin``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]idnin
|
||||
|
||||
This option processes [or does not process] IDN domain names on input. This requires
|
||||
``IDN SUPPORT`` to have been enabled at compile time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -380,7 +434,8 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
The IDN processing on input is disabled when ``dig`` output is redirected
|
||||
to files, pipes, and other non-tty file descriptors.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]idnout``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]idnout
|
||||
|
||||
This option converts [or does not convert] puny code on output. This requires
|
||||
``IDN SUPPORT`` to have been enabled at compile time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -388,24 +443,29 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
a tty. The puny code processing on output is disabled when ``dig`` output
|
||||
is redirected to files, pipes, and other non-tty file descriptors.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ignore``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ignore
|
||||
|
||||
This option ignores [or does not ignore] truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
|
||||
default, TCP retries are performed.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]keepalive``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]keepalive
|
||||
|
||||
This option sends [or does not send] an EDNS Keepalive option.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]keepopen``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]keepopen
|
||||
|
||||
This option keeps [or does not keep] the TCP socket open between queries, and reuses it rather than
|
||||
creating a new TCP socket for each lookup. The default is
|
||||
``+nokeepopen``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]multiline``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]multiline
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints [or does not print] records, like the SOA records, in a verbose multi-line format
|
||||
with human-readable comments. The default is to print each record on
|
||||
a single line to facilitate machine parsing of the ``dig`` output.
|
||||
|
||||
``+ndots=D``
|
||||
.. option:: +ndots=D
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the number of dots (``D``) that must appear in ``name`` for
|
||||
it to be considered absolute. The default value is that defined using
|
||||
the ``ndots`` statement in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, or 1 if no ``ndots``
|
||||
|
|
@ -414,24 +474,29 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
``search`` or ``domain`` directive in ``/etc/resolv.conf`` if
|
||||
``+search`` is set.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]nsid``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]nsid
|
||||
|
||||
When enabled, this option includes an EDNS name server ID request when sending a query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]nssearch``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]nssearch
|
||||
|
||||
When this option is set, ``dig`` attempts to find the authoritative
|
||||
name servers for the zone containing the name being looked up, and
|
||||
display the SOA record that each name server has for the zone.
|
||||
Addresses of servers that did not respond are also printed.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]onesoa``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]onesoa
|
||||
|
||||
When enabled, this option prints only one (starting) SOA record when performing an AXFR. The
|
||||
default is to print both the starting and ending SOA records.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]opcode=value``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]opcode=value
|
||||
|
||||
When enabled, this option sets (restores) the DNS message opcode to the specified value. The
|
||||
default value is QUERY (0).
|
||||
|
||||
``+padding=value``
|
||||
.. option:: +padding=value
|
||||
|
||||
This option pads the size of the query packet using the EDNS Padding option to
|
||||
blocks of ``value`` bytes. For example, ``+padding=32`` causes a
|
||||
48-byte query to be padded to 64 bytes. The default block size is 0,
|
||||
|
|
@ -440,42 +505,51 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
mandatory. Responses to padded queries may also be padded, but only
|
||||
if the query uses TCP or DNS COOKIE.
|
||||
|
||||
``+qid=value``
|
||||
.. option:: +qid=value
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the query ID to use when sending queries.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]qr``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]qr
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of the query message as it is sent. By default, the query
|
||||
is not printed.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]question``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]question
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of the question section of a query when an answer is
|
||||
returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]raflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]raflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the RA (Recursion Available) bit in the query. The
|
||||
default is ``+noraflag``. This bit is ignored by the server for
|
||||
QUERY.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]rdflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]rdflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option is a synonym for ``+[no]recurse``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]recurse``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]recurse
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
|
||||
This bit is set by default, which means ``dig`` normally sends
|
||||
recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled when the
|
||||
``+nssearch`` or ``+trace`` query option is used.
|
||||
|
||||
``+retry=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +retry=T
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the number of times to retry UDP and TCP queries to server to ``T``
|
||||
instead of the default, 2. Unlike ``+tries``, this does not include
|
||||
the initial query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]rrcomments``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]rrcomments
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of per-record comments in the output (for example,
|
||||
human-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
|
||||
not to print record comments unless multiline mode is active.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]search``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]search
|
||||
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
|
||||
directive in ``resolv.conf``, if any. The search list is not used by
|
||||
default.
|
||||
|
|
@ -484,36 +558,43 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
``+ndots``, determines whether the name is treated as relative
|
||||
and hence whether a search is eventually performed.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]short``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]short
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles whether a terse answer is provided. The default is to print the answer in a verbose
|
||||
form. This option always has a global effect; it cannot be set globally and
|
||||
then overridden on a per-lookup basis.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]showbadcookie``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]showbadcookie
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles whether to show the message containing the
|
||||
BADCOOKIE rcode before retrying the request or not. The default
|
||||
is to not show the messages.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]showsearch``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]showsearch
|
||||
|
||||
This option performs [or does not perform] a search showing intermediate results.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]sigchase``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]sigchase
|
||||
|
||||
This feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use ``delv``
|
||||
instead.
|
||||
|
||||
``+split=W``
|
||||
.. option:: +split=W
|
||||
|
||||
This option splits long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource records into
|
||||
chunks of ``W`` characters (where ``W`` is rounded up to the nearest
|
||||
multiple of 4). ``+nosplit`` or ``+split=0`` causes fields not to be
|
||||
split at all. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
|
||||
multiline mode is active.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]stats``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]stats
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query was made, the size of the
|
||||
reply, etc. The default behavior is to print the query statistics as a
|
||||
comment after each lookup.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]subnet=addr[/prefix-length]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]subnet=addr[/prefix-length]
|
||||
|
||||
This option sends [or does not send] an EDNS CLIENT-SUBNET option with the specified IP
|
||||
address or network prefix.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -522,30 +603,36 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
prefix-length of zero, which signals a resolver that the client's
|
||||
address information must *not* be used when resolving this query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]tcflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]tcflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the TC (TrunCation) bit in the query. The default is
|
||||
``+notcflag``. This bit is ignored by the server for QUERY.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]tcp``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]tcp
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates whether to use TCP when querying name servers.
|
||||
The default behavior is to use UDP unless a type ``any`` or ``ixfr=N``
|
||||
query is requested, in which case the default is TCP. AXFR queries
|
||||
always use TCP.
|
||||
|
||||
``+timeout=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +timeout=T
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the timeout for a query to ``T`` seconds. The default timeout is
|
||||
5 seconds. An attempt to set ``T`` to less than 1 is silently set to 1.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]tls``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]tls
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates whether to use DNS over TLS (DoT) when querying
|
||||
name servers. When this option is in use, the port number defaults
|
||||
to 853.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]topdown``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]topdown
|
||||
|
||||
This feature is related to ``dig +sigchase``, which is obsolete and
|
||||
has been removed. Use ``delv`` instead.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]trace``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]trace
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
|
||||
the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When
|
||||
tracing is enabled, ``dig`` makes iterative queries to resolve the
|
||||
|
|
@ -559,38 +646,46 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
|
|||
``+dnssec`` is also set when ``+trace`` is set, to better emulate the
|
||||
default queries from a name server.
|
||||
|
||||
``+tries=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +tries=T
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the number of times to try UDP and TCP queries to server to ``T``
|
||||
instead of the default, 3. If ``T`` is less than or equal to zero,
|
||||
the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1.
|
||||
|
||||
``+trusted-key=####``
|
||||
.. option:: +trusted-key=####
|
||||
|
||||
This option formerly specified trusted keys for use with ``dig +sigchase``. This
|
||||
feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use ``delv`` instead.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ttlid``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ttlid
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL when printing the record.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ttlunits``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ttlunits
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL in friendly human-readable time
|
||||
units of ``s``, ``m``, ``h``, ``d``, and ``w``, representing seconds, minutes,
|
||||
hours, days, and weeks. This implies ``+ttlid``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]unknownformat``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]unknownformat
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format (:rfc:`3597`).
|
||||
The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type's
|
||||
presentation format.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]vc``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]vc
|
||||
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
|
||||
syntax to ``+[no]tcp`` is provided for backwards compatibility. The
|
||||
``vc`` stands for "virtual circuit."
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]yaml``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]yaml
|
||||
|
||||
When enabled, this option prints the responses (and, if ``+qr`` is in use, also the
|
||||
outgoing queries) in a detailed YAML format.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]zflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]zflag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the last unassigned DNS header flag in a DNS query.
|
||||
This flag is off by default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,40 +39,49 @@ server or servers listed in ``/etc/resolv.conf``.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies that only IPv4 should be used for query transport. See also the ``-6`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies that only IPv6 should be used for query transport. See also the ``-4`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-a``
|
||||
.. option:: -a
|
||||
|
||||
The ``-a`` ("all") option is normally equivalent to ``-v -t ANY``. It
|
||||
also affects the behavior of the ``-l`` list zone option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A``
|
||||
.. option:: -A
|
||||
|
||||
The ``-A`` ("almost all") option is equivalent to ``-a``, except that RRSIG,
|
||||
NSEC, and NSEC3 records are omitted from the output.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the query class, which can be used to lookup HS (Hesiod) or CH (Chaosnet)
|
||||
class resource records. The default class is IN (Internet).
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``
|
||||
.. option:: -C
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that ``named`` should check consistency, meaning that ``host`` queries the SOA records for zone
|
||||
``name`` from all the listed authoritative name servers for that
|
||||
zone. The list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are
|
||||
found for the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d``
|
||||
.. option:: -d
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints debugging traces, and is equivalent to the ``-v`` verbose option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-l``
|
||||
.. option:: -l
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to list the zone, meaning the ``host`` command performs a zone transfer of zone
|
||||
``name`` and prints out the NS, PTR, and address records (A/AAAA).
|
||||
|
||||
Together, the ``-l -a`` options print all records in the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-N ndots``
|
||||
.. option:: -N ndots
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the number of dots (``ndots``) that have to be in ``name`` for it to be
|
||||
considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the
|
||||
``ndots`` statement in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, or 1 if no ``ndots`` statement
|
||||
|
|
@ -80,10 +89,12 @@ Options
|
|||
and are searched for in the domains listed in the ``search`` or
|
||||
``domain`` directive in ``/etc/resolv.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the port to query on the server. The default is 53.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r``
|
||||
.. option:: -r
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a non-recursive query; setting this option clears the RD (recursion
|
||||
desired) bit in the query. This means that the name server
|
||||
receiving the query does not attempt to resolve ``name``. The ``-r``
|
||||
|
|
@ -91,17 +102,20 @@ Options
|
|||
making non-recursive queries, and expecting to receive answers to
|
||||
those queries that can be referrals to other name servers.
|
||||
|
||||
``-R number``
|
||||
.. option:: -R number
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the number of retries for UDP queries. If ``number`` is negative or zero,
|
||||
the number of retries is silently set to 1. The default value is 1, or
|
||||
the value of the ``attempts`` option in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, if set.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s``
|
||||
.. option:: -s
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` *not* to send the query to the next nameserver if any server responds
|
||||
with a SERVFAIL response, which is the reverse of normal stub
|
||||
resolver behavior.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t type``
|
||||
.. option:: -t type
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the query type. The ``type`` argument can be any recognized query type:
|
||||
CNAME, NS, SOA, TXT, DNSKEY, AXFR, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -115,31 +129,37 @@ Options
|
|||
specified by appending an equals sign (=), followed by the starting serial
|
||||
number, e.g., ``-t IXFR=12345678``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T``; ``-U``
|
||||
.. option:: -T``; ``-U
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies TCP or UDP. By default, ``host`` uses UDP when making queries; the
|
||||
``-T`` option makes it use a TCP connection when querying the name
|
||||
server. TCP is automatically selected for queries that require
|
||||
it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests. Type ``ANY`` queries default
|
||||
to TCP, but can be forced to use UDP initially via ``-U``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-m flag``
|
||||
.. option:: -m flag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets memory usage debugging: the flag can be ``record``, ``usage``, or
|
||||
``trace``. The ``-m`` option can be specified more than once to set
|
||||
multiple flags.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets verbose output, and is equivalent to the ``-d`` debug option. Verbose output
|
||||
can also be enabled by setting the ``debug`` option in
|
||||
``/etc/resolv.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the version number and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-w``
|
||||
.. option:: -w
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets "wait forever": the query timeout is set to the maximum possible. See
|
||||
also the ``-W`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-W wait``
|
||||
.. option:: -W wait
|
||||
|
||||
This options sets the length of the wait timeout, indicating that ``named`` should wait for up to ``wait`` seconds for a reply. If ``wait`` is
|
||||
less than 1, the wait interval is set to 1 second.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -72,7 +72,8 @@ maintain a ``dsset-`` file as well as emit an ``nsupdate`` script.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -a algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
When converting CDS records to DS records, this option specifies
|
||||
the acceptable digest algorithms. This option can be repeated, so
|
||||
that multiple digest types are allowed. If none of the CDS records
|
||||
|
|
@ -87,15 +88,18 @@ Options
|
|||
are case-insensitive, and the hyphen may be omitted. If no algorithm
|
||||
is specified, the default is SHA-256 only.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class of the zones.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D``
|
||||
.. option:: -D
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates DS records from CDNSKEY records if both CDS and CDNSKEY
|
||||
records are present in the child zone. By default CDS records are
|
||||
preferred.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d path``
|
||||
.. option:: -d path
|
||||
|
||||
This specifies the location of the parent DS records. The path can be the name of a file
|
||||
containing the DS records; if it is a directory, ``dnssec-cds``
|
||||
looks for a ``dsset-`` file for the domain inside the directory.
|
||||
|
|
@ -104,14 +108,16 @@ Options
|
|||
were signed earlier than the modification time of the ``dsset-``
|
||||
file. This can be adjusted with the ``-s`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f child-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -f child-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the file containing the child's CDS and/or CDNSKEY records, plus its
|
||||
DNSKEY records and the covering RRSIG records, so that they can be
|
||||
authenticated.
|
||||
|
||||
The examples below describe how to generate this file.
|
||||
|
||||
``-iextension``
|
||||
.. option:: -iextension
|
||||
|
||||
This option updates the ``dsset-`` file in place, instead of writing DS records to
|
||||
the standard output.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,7 +131,8 @@ Options
|
|||
child records, provided that it is later than the file's current
|
||||
modification time.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s start-time``
|
||||
.. option:: -s start-time
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time after which RRSIG records become
|
||||
acceptable. This can be either an absolute or a relative time. An
|
||||
absolute start time is indicated by a number in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
|
||||
|
|
@ -137,12 +144,14 @@ Options
|
|||
If no start-time is specified, the modification time of the
|
||||
``dsset-`` file is used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -T ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a TTL to be used for new DS records. If not specified, the
|
||||
default is the TTL of the old DS records. If they had no explicit TTL,
|
||||
the new DS records also have no explicit TTL.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u``
|
||||
.. option:: -u
|
||||
|
||||
This option writes an ``nsupdate`` script to the standard output, instead of
|
||||
printing the new DS reords. The output is empty if no change is
|
||||
needed.
|
||||
|
|
@ -151,10 +160,12 @@ Options
|
|||
original ``dsset-`` file, with the ``-T`` option, or using the
|
||||
``nsupdate`` ``ttl`` command.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level. Level 1 is intended to be usefully verbose
|
||||
for general users; higher levels are intended for developers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -51,13 +51,16 @@ as generated by ``dnssec-keygen`` ``-C``.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-1``
|
||||
.. option:: -1
|
||||
|
||||
This option is an abbreviation for ``-a SHA1``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-2``
|
||||
.. option:: -2
|
||||
|
||||
This option is an abbreviation for ``-a SHA-256``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-a algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -a algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a digest algorithm to use when converting DNSKEY records to
|
||||
DS records. This option can be repeated, so that multiple DS records
|
||||
are created for each DNSKEY record.
|
||||
|
|
@ -66,19 +69,23 @@ Options
|
|||
are case-insensitive, and the hyphen may be omitted. If no algorithm
|
||||
is specified, the default is SHA-256.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A``
|
||||
.. option:: -A
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that ZSKs are to be included when generating DS records. Without this option, only
|
||||
keys which have the KSK flag set are converted to DS records and
|
||||
printed. This option is only useful in ``-f`` zone file mode.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class; the default is IN. This option is only useful in ``-s`` keyset
|
||||
or ``-f`` zone file mode.
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``
|
||||
.. option:: -C
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates CDS records rather than DS records.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f file``
|
||||
.. option:: -f file
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets zone file mode, in which the final dnsname argument of ``dnssec-dsfromkey`` is the
|
||||
DNS domain name of a zone whose master file can be read from
|
||||
``file``. If the zone name is the same as ``file``, then it may be
|
||||
|
|
@ -90,23 +97,29 @@ Options
|
|||
|
||||
``dig dnskey example.com | dnssec-dsfromkey -f - example.com``
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints usage information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells BIND 9 to look for key files or ``keyset-`` files in ``directory``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s``
|
||||
.. option:: -s
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables keyset mode, in which the final dnsname argument from ``dnssec-dsfromkey`` is the DNS
|
||||
domain name used to locate a ``keyset-`` file.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T TTL``
|
||||
.. option:: -T TTL
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the TTL of the DS records. By default the TTL is omitted.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
Example
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -41,7 +41,8 @@ DNSKEY RRset on schedule even if the true private key is stored offline.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-f filename``
|
||||
.. option:: -f filename
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the zone file mode. Instead of a public keyfile name, the argument is the
|
||||
DNS domain name of a zone master file, which can be read from
|
||||
``filename``. If the domain name is the same as ``filename``, then it may be
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,23 +51,28 @@ Options
|
|||
If ``filename`` is set to ``"-"``, then the zone data is read from the
|
||||
standard input.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -L ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
||||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
place, in which case the existing TTL takes precedence. Setting the default TTL to ``0`` or ``none``
|
||||
removes it from the key.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option emits a usage message and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
Timing Options
|
||||
|
|
@ -81,21 +87,25 @@ months (defined as 30 24-hour days), weeks, days, hours, or minutes,
|
|||
respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
||||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use ``none`` or ``never``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-D sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -37,7 +37,8 @@ match the name of the zone for which the key is being generated.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -a algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This option selects the cryptographic algorithm. The value of ``algorithm`` must
|
||||
be one of RSASHA1, NSEC3RSASHA1, RSASHA256, RSASHA512,
|
||||
ECDSAP256SHA256, ECDSAP384SHA384, ED25519, or ED448.
|
||||
|
|
@ -57,20 +58,23 @@ Options
|
|||
``-S`` option, which copies the algorithm from the predecessory key.
|
||||
Previously, the default for newly generated keys was RSASHA1.
|
||||
|
||||
``-3``
|
||||
.. option:: -3
|
||||
|
||||
This option uses an NSEC3-capable algorithm to generate a DNSSEC key. If this
|
||||
option is used with an algorithm that has both NSEC and NSEC3
|
||||
versions, then the NSEC3 version is used; for example,
|
||||
``dnssec-keygen -3a RSASHA1`` specifies the NSEC3RSASHA1 algorithm.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use.
|
||||
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually ``pkcs11``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-l label``
|
||||
.. option:: -l label
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the label for a key pair in the crypto hardware.
|
||||
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL-based PKCS#11 support, the label is
|
||||
|
|
@ -78,14 +82,16 @@ Options
|
|||
preceded by an optional OpenSSL engine name, followed by a colon, as
|
||||
in ``pkcs11:keylabel``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-n nametype``
|
||||
.. option:: -n nametype
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the owner type of the key. The value of ``nametype`` must
|
||||
either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY
|
||||
(for a key associated with a host (KEY)), USER (for a key associated
|
||||
with a user (KEY)), or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are
|
||||
case-insensitive.
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``
|
||||
.. option:: -C
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables compatibility mode, which generates an old-style key, without any metadata.
|
||||
By default, ``dnssec-keyfromlabel`` includes the key's creation
|
||||
date in the metadata stored with the private key; other dates may
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,26 +99,32 @@ Options
|
|||
that include this data may be incompatible with older versions of
|
||||
BIND; the ``-C`` option suppresses them.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have the
|
||||
specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f flag``
|
||||
.. option:: -f flag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the specified flag in the ``flag`` field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
|
||||
The only recognized flags are KSK (Key-Signing Key) and REVOKE.
|
||||
|
||||
``-G``
|
||||
.. option:: -G
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates a key, but does not publish it or sign with it. This option is
|
||||
incompatible with ``-P`` and ``-A``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
``dnssec-keyfromlabel``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to be written.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k``
|
||||
.. option:: -k
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates KEY records rather than DNSKEY records.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L`` ttl
|
||||
|
|
@ -122,12 +134,14 @@ Options
|
|||
place, in which case the existing TTL would take precedence. Setting
|
||||
the default TTL to ``0`` or ``none`` removes it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p protocol``
|
||||
.. option:: -p protocol
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the protocol value for the key. The protocol is a number between
|
||||
0 and 255. The default is 3 (DNSSEC). Other possible values for this
|
||||
argument are listed in :rfc:`2535` and its successors.
|
||||
|
||||
``-S key``
|
||||
.. option:: -S key
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates a key as an explicit successor to an existing key. The name,
|
||||
algorithm, size, and type of the key are set to match the
|
||||
predecessor. The activation date of the new key is set to the
|
||||
|
|
@ -135,19 +149,23 @@ Options
|
|||
set to the activation date minus the prepublication interval, which
|
||||
defaults to 30 days.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t type``
|
||||
.. option:: -t type
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the type of the key. ``type`` must be one of AUTHCONF,
|
||||
NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers
|
||||
to the ability to authenticate data, and CONF to the ability to encrypt
|
||||
data.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-y``
|
||||
.. option:: -y
|
||||
|
||||
This option allows DNSSEC key files to be generated even if the key ID would
|
||||
collide with that of an existing key, in the event of either key
|
||||
being revoked. (This is only safe to enable if
|
||||
|
|
@ -166,41 +184,49 @@ months (defined as 30 24-hour days), weeks, days, hours, or minutes,
|
|||
respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
||||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use ``none`` or ``never``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it. If not set, and if the ``-G`` option has not been used, the
|
||||
default is the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -A date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be activated. After that date,
|
||||
the key is included in the zone and used to sign it. If not set,
|
||||
and if the ``-G`` option has not been used, the default is the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
``-R date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -R date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be revoked. After that date, the
|
||||
key is flagged as revoked. It is included in the zone and
|
||||
is used to sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-I date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -I date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be retired. After that date, the
|
||||
key is still included in the zone, but it is not used to
|
||||
sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-D sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i interval``
|
||||
.. option:: -i interval
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the prepublication interval for a key. If set, then the
|
||||
publication and activation dates must be separated by at least this
|
||||
much time. If the activation date is specified but the publication
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -36,13 +36,15 @@ generated.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-3``
|
||||
.. option:: -3
|
||||
|
||||
This option uses an NSEC3-capable algorithm to generate a DNSSEC key. If this
|
||||
option is used with an algorithm that has both NSEC and NSEC3
|
||||
versions, then the NSEC3 version is selected; for example,
|
||||
``dnssec-keygen -3a RSASHA1`` specifies the NSEC3RSASHA1 algorithm.
|
||||
|
||||
``-a algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: -a algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This option selects the cryptographic algorithm. For DNSSEC keys, the value of
|
||||
``algorithm`` must be one of RSASHA1, NSEC3RSASHA1, RSASHA256,
|
||||
RSASHA512, ECDSAP256SHA256, ECDSAP384SHA384, ED25519, or ED448. For
|
||||
|
|
@ -61,7 +63,8 @@ Options
|
|||
keys, but that feature was removed in BIND 9.13.0. Use
|
||||
``tsig-keygen`` to generate TSIG keys.
|
||||
|
||||
``-b keysize``
|
||||
.. option:: -b keysize
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the number of bits in the key. The choice of key size
|
||||
depends on the algorithm used: RSA keys must be between 1024 and 4096
|
||||
bits; Diffie-Hellman keys must be between 128 and 4096 bits. Elliptic
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,7 +75,8 @@ Options
|
|||
have a default size of 1024 bits; RSA keys for use as key-signing
|
||||
keys (KSKs, generated with ``-f KSK``) default to 2048 bits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``
|
||||
.. option:: -C
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables compatibility mode, which generates an old-style key, without any timing
|
||||
metadata. By default, ``dnssec-keygen`` includes the key's
|
||||
creation date in the metadata stored with the private key; other
|
||||
|
|
@ -80,44 +84,53 @@ Options
|
|||
etc. Keys that include this data may be incompatible with older
|
||||
versions of BIND; the ``-C`` option suppresses them.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have the
|
||||
specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d bits``
|
||||
.. option:: -d bits
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the key size in bits. For the algorithms RSASHA1, NSEC3RSASA1, RSASHA256, and
|
||||
RSASHA512 the key size must be between 1024 and 4096 bits; DH size is between 128
|
||||
and 4096 bits. This option is ignored for algorithms ECDSAP256SHA256,
|
||||
ECDSAP384SHA384, ED25519, and ED448.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually ``pkcs11``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-f flag``
|
||||
.. option:: -f flag
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the specified flag in the flag field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
|
||||
The only recognized flags are KSK (Key-Signing Key) and REVOKE.
|
||||
|
||||
``-G``
|
||||
.. option:: -G
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates a key, but does not publish it or sign with it. This option is
|
||||
incompatible with ``-P`` and ``-A``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-g generator``
|
||||
.. option:: -g generator
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the generator to use if generating a Diffie-Hellman key. Allowed
|
||||
values are 2 and 5. If no generator is specified, a known prime from
|
||||
:rfc:`2539` is used if possible; otherwise the default is 2.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
``dnssec-keygen``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to be written.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k policy``
|
||||
.. option:: -k policy
|
||||
|
||||
This option creates keys for a specific ``dnssec-policy``. If a policy uses multiple keys,
|
||||
``dnssec-keygen`` generates multiple keys. This also
|
||||
creates a ".state" file to keep track of the key state.
|
||||
|
|
@ -126,7 +139,8 @@ Options
|
|||
it cannot be used at the same time as many of the other options that
|
||||
``dnssec-keygen`` provides.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -L ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
||||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
|
|
@ -135,24 +149,28 @@ Options
|
|||
defaults to the SOA TTL. Setting the default TTL to ``0`` or ``none``
|
||||
is the same as leaving it unset.
|
||||
|
||||
``-l file``
|
||||
.. option:: -l file
|
||||
|
||||
This option provides a configuration file that contains a ``dnssec-policy`` statement
|
||||
(matching the policy set with ``-k``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-n nametype``
|
||||
.. option:: -n nametype
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the owner type of the key. The value of ``nametype`` must
|
||||
either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY
|
||||
(for a key associated with a host (KEY)), USER (for a key associated
|
||||
with a user (KEY)), or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are
|
||||
case-insensitive. The default is ZONE for DNSKEY generation.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p protocol``
|
||||
.. option:: -p protocol
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the protocol value for the generated key, for use with
|
||||
``-T KEY``. The protocol is a number between 0 and 255. The default
|
||||
is 3 (DNSSEC). Other possible values for this argument are listed in
|
||||
:rfc:`2535` and its successors.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which suppresses unnecessary output, including progress
|
||||
indication. Without this option, when ``dnssec-keygen`` is run
|
||||
interactively to generate an RSA or DSA key pair, it prints a
|
||||
|
|
@ -162,7 +180,8 @@ Options
|
|||
round of the Miller-Rabin primality test; and a space ( ) means that the
|
||||
number has passed all the tests and is a satisfactory key.
|
||||
|
||||
``-S key``
|
||||
.. option:: -S key
|
||||
|
||||
This option creates a new key which is an explicit successor to an existing key.
|
||||
The name, algorithm, size, and type of the key are set to match
|
||||
the existing key. The activation date of the new key is set to
|
||||
|
|
@ -170,26 +189,31 @@ Options
|
|||
set to the activation date minus the prepublication interval,
|
||||
which defaults to 30 days.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s strength``
|
||||
.. option:: -s strength
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the strength value of the key. The strength is a number
|
||||
between 0 and 15, and currently has no defined purpose in DNSSEC.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T rrtype``
|
||||
.. option:: -T rrtype
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the resource record type to use for the key. ``rrtype``
|
||||
must be either DNSKEY or KEY. The default is DNSKEY when using a
|
||||
DNSSEC algorithm, but it can be overridden to KEY for use with
|
||||
SIG(0).
|
||||
|
||||
``-t type``
|
||||
.. option:: -t type
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the type of the key for use with ``-T KEY``. ``type``
|
||||
must be one of AUTHCONF, NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default
|
||||
is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers to the ability to authenticate data, and
|
||||
CONF to the ability to encrypt data.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
Timing Options
|
||||
|
|
@ -204,43 +228,51 @@ months (defined as 30 24-hour days), weeks, days, hours, or minutes,
|
|||
respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
||||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use ``none`` or ``never``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it. If not set, and if the ``-G`` option has not been used, the
|
||||
default is the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -A date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be activated. After that date,
|
||||
the key is included in the zone and used to sign it. If not set,
|
||||
and if the ``-G`` option has not been used, the default is the current date. If set,
|
||||
and ``-P`` is not set, the publication date is set to the
|
||||
activation date minus the prepublication interval.
|
||||
|
||||
``-R date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -R date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be revoked. After that date, the
|
||||
key is flagged as revoked. It is included in the zone and
|
||||
is used to sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-I date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -I date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be retired. After that date, the
|
||||
key is still included in the zone, but it is not used to
|
||||
sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-D sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i interval``
|
||||
.. option:: -i interval
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the prepublication interval for a key. If set, then the
|
||||
publication and activation dates must be separated by at least this
|
||||
much time. If the activation date is specified but the publication
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -31,34 +31,42 @@ containing the now-revoked key.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option emits a usage message and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r``
|
||||
.. option:: -r
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates to remove the original keyset files after writing the new keyset files.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually ``pkcs11``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-f``
|
||||
.. option:: -f
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates a forced overwrite and causes ``dnssec-revoke`` to write the new key pair,
|
||||
even if a file already exists matching the algorithm and key ID of
|
||||
the revoked key.
|
||||
|
||||
``-R``
|
||||
.. option:: -R
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the key tag of the key with the REVOKE bit set, but does not
|
||||
revoke the key.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -59,7 +59,8 @@ purposes.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-f``
|
||||
.. option:: -f
|
||||
|
||||
This option forces an update of an old-format key with no metadata fields. Without
|
||||
this option, ``dnssec-settime`` fails when attempting to update a
|
||||
legacy key. With this option, the key is recreated in the new
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,10 +69,12 @@ Options
|
|||
specified, then the key's publication and activation dates are also
|
||||
set to the present time.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -L ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
||||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
|
|
@ -80,16 +83,20 @@ Options
|
|||
defaults to the SOA TTL. Setting the default TTL to ``0`` or ``none``
|
||||
removes it from the key.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option emits a usage message and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,47 +115,57 @@ months (defined as 30 24-hour days), weeks, days, hours, or minutes,
|
|||
respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
||||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use ``none`` or ``never``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P ds date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P ds date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which DS records that match this key have been
|
||||
seen in the parent zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -P sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -A date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be activated. After that date,
|
||||
the key is included in the zone and used to sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-R date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -R date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be revoked. After that date, the
|
||||
key is flagged as revoked. It is included in the zone and
|
||||
is used to sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-I date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -I date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be retired. After that date, the
|
||||
key is still included in the zone, but it is not used to
|
||||
sign it.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-D ds date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D ds date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the DS records that match this key have
|
||||
been seen removed from the parent zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D sync date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -D sync date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
``-S predecessor key``
|
||||
.. option:: -S predecessor key
|
||||
|
||||
This option selects a key for which the key being modified is an explicit
|
||||
successor. The name, algorithm, size, and type of the predecessor key
|
||||
must exactly match those of the key being modified. The activation
|
||||
|
|
@ -156,7 +173,8 @@ explicitly prevent a date from being set, use ``none`` or ``never``.
|
|||
predecessor. The publication date is set to the activation date
|
||||
minus the prepublication interval, which defaults to 30 days.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i interval``
|
||||
.. option:: -i interval
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the prepublication interval for a key. If set, then the
|
||||
publication and activation dates must be separated by at least this
|
||||
much time. If the activation date is specified but the publication
|
||||
|
|
@ -183,22 +201,28 @@ purpose, but should never be used in production.
|
|||
|
||||
Known key states are HIDDEN, RUMOURED, OMNIPRESENT, and UNRETENTIVE.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s``
|
||||
.. option:: -s
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that when setting key timing data, the state file should also be updated.
|
||||
|
||||
``-g state``
|
||||
.. option:: -g state
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the goal state for this key. Must be HIDDEN or OMNIPRESENT.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d state date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -d state date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the DS state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k state date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -k state date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the DNSKEY state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r state date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -r state date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the RRSIG (KSK) state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
``-z state date/offset``
|
||||
.. option:: -z state date/offset
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the RRSIG (ZSK) state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
Printing Options
|
||||
|
|
@ -207,10 +231,12 @@ Printing Options
|
|||
``dnssec-settime`` can also be used to print the timing metadata
|
||||
associated with a key.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u``
|
||||
.. option:: -u
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that times should be printed in Unix epoch format.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p C/P/Pds/Psync/A/R/I/D/Dds/Dsync/all``
|
||||
.. option:: -p C/P/Pds/Psync/A/R/I/D/Dds/Dsync/all
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a specific metadata value or set of metadata values.
|
||||
The ``-p`` option may be followed by one or more of the following letters or
|
||||
strings to indicate which value or values to print: ``C`` for the
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -33,21 +33,26 @@ file for each child zone.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-a``
|
||||
.. option:: -a
|
||||
|
||||
This option verifies all generated signatures.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class of the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``
|
||||
.. option:: -C
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets compatibility mode, in which a ``keyset-zonename`` file is generated in addition
|
||||
to ``dsset-zonename`` when signing a zone, for use by older versions
|
||||
of ``dnssec-signzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -d directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the directory where BIND 9 should look for ``dsset-`` or ``keyset-`` files.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D``
|
||||
.. option:: -D
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that only those record types automatically managed by
|
||||
``dnssec-signzone``, i.e., RRSIG, NSEC, NSEC3 and NSEC3PARAM records, should be included in the output.
|
||||
If smart signing (``-S``) is used, DNSKEY records are also included.
|
||||
|
|
@ -55,7 +60,8 @@ Options
|
|||
``$INCLUDE``. This option cannot be combined with ``-O raw``
|
||||
or serial-number updating.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the hardware to use for cryptographic
|
||||
operations, such as a secure key store used for signing, when applicable.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -63,19 +69,23 @@ Options
|
|||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually ``pkcs11``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-g``
|
||||
.. option:: -g
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that DS records for child zones should be generated from a ``dsset-`` or ``keyset-``
|
||||
file. Existing DS records are removed.
|
||||
|
||||
``-K directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -K directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the directory to search for DNSSEC keys. If not
|
||||
specified, it defaults to the current directory.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k key``
|
||||
.. option:: -k key
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells BIND 9 to treat the specified key as a key-signing key, ignoring any key flags. This
|
||||
option may be specified multiple times.
|
||||
|
||||
``-M maxttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -M maxttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the maximum TTL for the signed zone. Any TTL higher than ``maxttl``
|
||||
in the input zone is reduced to ``maxttl`` in the output. This
|
||||
provides certainty as to the largest possible TTL in the signed zone,
|
||||
|
|
@ -86,7 +96,8 @@ Options
|
|||
``named.conf``. (Note: This option is incompatible with ``-D``,
|
||||
because it modifies non-DNSSEC data in the output zone.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-s start-time``
|
||||
.. option:: -s start-time
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time when the generated RRSIG records become
|
||||
valid. This can be either an absolute or relative time. An absolute
|
||||
start time is indicated by a number in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation;
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,7 +106,8 @@ Options
|
|||
time. If no ``start-time`` is specified, the current time minus 1
|
||||
hour (to allow for clock skew) is used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-e end-time``
|
||||
.. option:: -e end-time
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time when the generated RRSIG records expire. As
|
||||
with ``start-time``, an absolute time is indicated in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
|
||||
notation. A time relative to the start time is indicated with ``+N``,
|
||||
|
|
@ -104,7 +116,8 @@ Options
|
|||
specified, 30 days from the start time is the default.
|
||||
``end-time`` must be later than ``start-time``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-X extended end-time``
|
||||
.. option:: -X extended end-time
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time when the generated RRSIG records for the
|
||||
DNSKEY RRset expire. This is to be used in cases when the DNSKEY
|
||||
signatures need to persist longer than signatures on other records;
|
||||
|
|
@ -119,20 +132,24 @@ Options
|
|||
as the default. (``end-time``, in turn, defaults to 30 days from the
|
||||
start time.) ``extended end-time`` must be later than ``start-time``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-f output-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -f output-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the name of the output file containing the signed zone. The default
|
||||
is to append ``.signed`` to the input filename. If ``output-file`` is
|
||||
set to ``-``, then the signed zone is written to the standard
|
||||
output, with a default output format of ``full``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
``dnssec-signzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i interval``
|
||||
.. option:: -i interval
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that, when a previously signed zone is passed as input, records may be
|
||||
re-signed. The ``interval`` option specifies the cycle interval as an
|
||||
offset from the current time, in seconds. If a RRSIG record expires
|
||||
|
|
@ -146,14 +163,16 @@ Options
|
|||
days. Therefore, if any existing RRSIG records are due to expire in
|
||||
less than 7.5 days, they are replaced.
|
||||
|
||||
``-I input-format``
|
||||
.. option:: -I input-format
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the format of the input zone file. Possible formats are
|
||||
``text`` (the default), and ``raw``. This option is primarily
|
||||
intended to be used for dynamic signed zones, so that the dumped zone
|
||||
file in a non-text format containing updates can be signed directly.
|
||||
This option is not useful for non-dynamic zones.
|
||||
|
||||
``-j jitter``
|
||||
.. option:: -j jitter
|
||||
|
||||
When signing a zone with a fixed signature lifetime, all RRSIG
|
||||
records issued at the time of signing expire simultaneously. If the
|
||||
zone is incrementally signed, i.e., a previously signed zone is passed
|
||||
|
|
@ -168,16 +187,19 @@ Options
|
|||
less congestion than if all validators need to refetch at around the
|
||||
same time.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L serial``
|
||||
.. option:: -L serial
|
||||
|
||||
When writing a signed zone to "raw" format, this option sets the "source
|
||||
serial" value in the header to the specified ``serial`` number. (This is
|
||||
expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-n ncpus``
|
||||
.. option:: -n ncpus
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the number of threads to use. By default, one thread is
|
||||
started for each detected CPU.
|
||||
|
||||
``-N soa-serial-format``
|
||||
.. option:: -N soa-serial-format
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the SOA serial number format of the signed zone. Possible formats are
|
||||
``keep`` (the default), ``increment``, ``unixtime``, and
|
||||
``date``.
|
||||
|
|
@ -200,11 +222,13 @@ Options
|
|||
than or equal to that value, in which case it is simply
|
||||
incremented by one.
|
||||
|
||||
``-o origin``
|
||||
.. option:: -o origin
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file is
|
||||
assumed to be the origin.
|
||||
|
||||
``-O output-format``
|
||||
.. option:: -O output-format
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the format of the output file containing the signed
|
||||
zone. Possible formats are ``text`` (the default), which is the standard
|
||||
textual representation of the zone; ``full``, which is text output in a
|
||||
|
|
@ -214,7 +238,8 @@ Options
|
|||
if N is 0, the raw file can be read by any version of ``named``; if N is
|
||||
1, the file can be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P``
|
||||
.. option:: -P
|
||||
|
||||
This option disables post-sign verification tests.
|
||||
|
||||
The post-sign verification tests ensure that for each algorithm in
|
||||
|
|
@ -222,7 +247,8 @@ Options
|
|||
revoked KSK keys are self-signed, and that all records in the zone
|
||||
are signed by the algorithm. This option skips these tests.
|
||||
|
||||
``-Q``
|
||||
.. option:: -Q
|
||||
|
||||
This option removes signatures from keys that are no longer active.
|
||||
|
||||
Normally, when a previously signed zone is passed as input to the
|
||||
|
|
@ -234,14 +260,16 @@ Options
|
|||
active. This enables ZSK rollover using the procedure described in
|
||||
:rfc:`4641#4.2.1.1` ("Pre-Publish Key Rollover").
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables quiet mode, which suppresses unnecessary output. Without this option, when
|
||||
``dnssec-signzone`` is run it prints three pieces of information to standard output: the number of
|
||||
keys in use; the algorithms used to verify the zone was signed correctly and
|
||||
other status information; and the filename containing the signed
|
||||
zone. With the option that output is suppressed, leaving only the filename.
|
||||
|
||||
``-R``
|
||||
.. option:: -R
|
||||
|
||||
This option removes signatures from keys that are no longer published.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is similar to ``-Q``, except it forces
|
||||
|
|
@ -250,7 +278,8 @@ Options
|
|||
:rfc:`4641#4.2.1.2` ("Double Signature Zone Signing Key
|
||||
Rollover").
|
||||
|
||||
``-S``
|
||||
.. option:: -S
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables smart signing, which instructs ``dnssec-signzone`` to search the key
|
||||
repository for keys that match the zone being signed, and to include
|
||||
them in the zone if appropriate.
|
||||
|
|
@ -283,7 +312,8 @@ Options
|
|||
If the key's sync deletion date is set and is in the past,
|
||||
synchronization records (type CDS and/or CDNSKEY) are removed.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T ttl``
|
||||
.. option:: -T ttl
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a TTL to be used for new DNSKEY records imported into the
|
||||
zone from the key repository. If not specified, the default is the
|
||||
TTL value from the zone's SOA record. This option is ignored when
|
||||
|
|
@ -295,40 +325,48 @@ Options
|
|||
conflict between TTL values in imported keys, the shortest one is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t``
|
||||
.. option:: -t
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints statistics at completion.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u``
|
||||
.. option:: -u
|
||||
|
||||
This option updates the NSEC/NSEC3 chain when re-signing a previously signed zone.
|
||||
With this option, a zone signed with NSEC can be switched to NSEC3,
|
||||
or a zone signed with NSEC3 can be switched to NSEC or to NSEC3 with
|
||||
different parameters. Without this option, ``dnssec-signzone``
|
||||
retains the existing chain when re-signing.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x``
|
||||
.. option:: -x
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that BIND 9 should only sign the DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS RRsets with key-signing keys,
|
||||
and should omit signatures from zone-signing keys. (This is similar to the
|
||||
``dnssec-dnskey-kskonly yes;`` zone option in ``named``.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-z``
|
||||
.. option:: -z
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that BIND 9 should ignore the KSK flag on keys when determining what to sign. This causes
|
||||
KSK-flagged keys to sign all records, not just the DNSKEY RRset.
|
||||
(This is similar to the ``update-check-ksk no;`` zone option in
|
||||
``named``.)
|
||||
|
||||
``-3 salt``
|
||||
.. option:: -3 salt
|
||||
|
||||
This option generates an NSEC3 chain with the given hex-encoded salt. A dash
|
||||
(-) can be used to indicate that no salt is to be used when
|
||||
generating the NSEC3 chain.
|
||||
|
||||
``-H iterations``
|
||||
.. option:: -H iterations
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that, when generating an NSEC3 chain, BIND 9 should use this many iterations. The default
|
||||
is 10.
|
||||
|
||||
``-A``
|
||||
.. option:: -A
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that, when generating an NSEC3 chain, BIND 9 should set the OPTOUT flag on all NSEC3
|
||||
records and should not generate NSEC3 records for insecure delegations.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -336,10 +374,12 @@ Options
|
|||
all records. This is useful when using the ``-u`` option to modify an
|
||||
NSEC3 chain which previously had OPTOUT set.
|
||||
|
||||
``zonefile``
|
||||
.. option:: zonefile
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the file containing the zone to be signed.
|
||||
|
||||
``key``
|
||||
.. option:: key
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies which keys should be used to sign the zone. If no keys are
|
||||
specified, the zone is examined for DNSKEY records at the
|
||||
zone apex. If these records are found and there are matching private keys in
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -31,48 +31,57 @@ NSEC/NSEC3 chains are complete.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class of the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually ``pkcs11``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-I input-format``
|
||||
.. option:: -I input-format
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the format of the input zone file. Possible formats are ``text``
|
||||
(the default) and ``raw``. This option is primarily intended to be used
|
||||
for dynamic signed zones, so that the dumped zone file in a non-text
|
||||
format containing updates can be verified independently.
|
||||
This option is not useful for non-dynamic zones.
|
||||
|
||||
``-o origin``
|
||||
.. option:: -o origin
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file is
|
||||
assumed to be the origin.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v level``
|
||||
.. option:: -v level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which suppresses output. Without this option, when ``dnssec-verify``
|
||||
is run it prints to standard output the number of keys in use, the
|
||||
algorithms used to verify the zone was signed correctly, and other status
|
||||
information. With this option, all non-error output is suppressed, and only the exit
|
||||
code indicates success.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x``
|
||||
.. option:: -x
|
||||
|
||||
This option verifies only that the DNSKEY RRset is signed with key-signing keys.
|
||||
Without this flag, it is assumed that the DNSKEY RRset is signed
|
||||
by all active keys. When this flag is set, it is not an error if
|
||||
the DNSKEY RRset is not signed by zone-signing keys. This corresponds
|
||||
to the ``-x`` option in ``dnssec-signzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-z``
|
||||
.. option:: -z
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates that the KSK flag on the keys should be ignored when determining whether the zone is
|
||||
correctly signed. Without this flag, it is assumed that there is
|
||||
a non-revoked, self-signed DNSKEY with the KSK flag set for each
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -35,30 +35,36 @@ listens for queries.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to use only IPv4, even if the host machine is capable of IPv6. ``-4`` and
|
||||
``-6`` are mutually exclusive.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to use only IPv6, even if the host machine is capable of IPv4. ``-4`` and
|
||||
``-6`` are mutually exclusive.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c config-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -c config-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to use ``config-file`` as its configuration file instead of the default,
|
||||
|named_conf|. To ensure that the configuration file
|
||||
can be reloaded after the server has changed its working directory
|
||||
due to to a possible ``directory`` option in the configuration file,
|
||||
``config-file`` should be an absolute pathname.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d debug-level``
|
||||
.. option:: -d debug-level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the daemon's debug level to ``debug-level``. Debugging traces from
|
||||
``named`` become more verbose as the debug level increases.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D string``
|
||||
.. option:: -D string
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies a string that is used to identify a instance of ``named``
|
||||
in a process listing. The contents of ``string`` are not examined.
|
||||
|
||||
``-E engine-name``
|
||||
.. option:: -E engine-name
|
||||
|
||||
When applicable, this option specifies the hardware to use for cryptographic
|
||||
operations, such as a secure key store used for signing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -66,16 +72,20 @@ Options
|
|||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually ``pkcs11``).
|
||||
|
||||
``-f``
|
||||
.. option:: -f
|
||||
|
||||
This option runs the server in the foreground (i.e., do not daemonize).
|
||||
|
||||
``-g``
|
||||
.. option:: -g
|
||||
|
||||
This option runs the server in the foreground and forces all logging to ``stderr``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L logfile``
|
||||
.. option:: -L logfile
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the log to the file ``logfile`` by default, instead of the system log.
|
||||
|
||||
``-M option``
|
||||
.. option:: -M option
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the default memory context options. If set to ``external``,
|
||||
the internal memory manager is bypassed in favor of
|
||||
system-provided memory allocation functions. If set to ``fill``, blocks
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,18 +94,21 @@ Options
|
|||
and is the default unless ``named`` has been compiled with developer
|
||||
options.
|
||||
|
||||
``-m flag``
|
||||
.. option:: -m flag
|
||||
|
||||
This option turns on memory usage debugging flags. Possible flags are ``usage``,
|
||||
``trace``, ``record``, ``size``, and ``mctx``. These correspond to the
|
||||
``ISC_MEM_DEBUGXXXX`` flags described in ``<isc/mem.h>``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-n #cpus``
|
||||
.. option:: -n #cpus
|
||||
|
||||
This option creates ``#cpus`` worker threads to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If
|
||||
not specified, ``named`` tries to determine the number of CPUs
|
||||
present and creates one thread per CPU. If it is unable to determine
|
||||
the number of CPUs, a single worker thread is created.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p value``
|
||||
.. option:: -p value
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the port(s) on which the server will listen
|
||||
for queries. If ``value`` is of the form ``<portnum>`` or
|
||||
``dns=<portnum>``, the server will listen for DNS queries on
|
||||
|
|
@ -106,8 +119,9 @@ Options
|
|||
listen for HTTPS queries on ``portnum``; the default is 443.
|
||||
If ``value`` is of the form ``http=<portnum>``, the server will
|
||||
listen for HTTP queries on ``portnum``; the default is 80.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s``
|
||||
|
||||
.. option:: -s
|
||||
|
||||
This option writes memory usage statistics to ``stdout`` on exit.
|
||||
|
||||
.. note::
|
||||
|
|
@ -115,7 +129,8 @@ Options
|
|||
This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers and may be
|
||||
removed or changed in a future release.
|
||||
|
||||
``-S #max-socks``
|
||||
.. option:: -S #max-socks
|
||||
|
||||
This option is deprecated and no longer has any function.
|
||||
|
||||
.. warning::
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,7 +145,8 @@ Options
|
|||
specified value, because ``named`` reserves some file descriptors
|
||||
for its internal use.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t directory``
|
||||
.. option:: -t directory
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` to chroot to ``directory`` after processing the command-line arguments, but
|
||||
before reading the configuration file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,7 +157,8 @@ Options
|
|||
most systems; the way ``chroot`` is defined allows a process
|
||||
with root privileges to escape a chroot jail.
|
||||
|
||||
``-U #listeners``
|
||||
.. option:: -U #listeners
|
||||
|
||||
This option tells ``named`` the number of ``#listeners`` worker threads to listen on, for incoming UDP packets on
|
||||
each address. If not specified, ``named`` calculates a default
|
||||
value based on the number of detected CPUs: 1 for 1 CPU, and the
|
||||
|
|
@ -151,7 +168,8 @@ Options
|
|||
CPUs, then ``-U`` may be increased as high as that value, but no
|
||||
higher.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u user``
|
||||
.. option:: -u user
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the setuid to ``user`` after completing privileged operations, such as
|
||||
creating sockets that listen on privileged ports.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -165,13 +183,16 @@ Options
|
|||
previous kernels did not allow privileges to be retained after
|
||||
``setuid``.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option reports the version number and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option reports the version number and build options, and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-X lock-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -X lock-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option acquires a lock on the specified file at runtime; this helps to
|
||||
prevent duplicate ``named`` instances from running simultaneously.
|
||||
Use of this option overrides the ``lock-file`` option in
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -63,26 +63,33 @@ used by Windows 2000 can be switched on with the ``-o`` flag.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets use of IPv4 only.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets use of IPv6 only.
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``
|
||||
.. option:: -C
|
||||
|
||||
Overrides the default `resolv.conf` file. This is only intended for testing.
|
||||
|
||||
``-d``
|
||||
.. option:: -d
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets debug mode, which provides tracing information about the update
|
||||
requests that are made and the replies received from the name server.
|
||||
|
||||
``-D``
|
||||
.. option:: -D
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets extra debug mode.
|
||||
|
||||
``-i``
|
||||
.. option:: -i
|
||||
|
||||
This option forces interactive mode, even when standard input is not a terminal.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k keyfile``
|
||||
.. option:: -k keyfile
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates the file containing the TSIG authentication key. Keyfiles may be in
|
||||
two formats: a single file containing a ``named.conf``-format ``key``
|
||||
statement, which may be generated automatically by ``ddns-confgen``;
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,7 +100,8 @@ Options
|
|||
key used to authenticate Dynamic DNS update requests. In this case,
|
||||
the key specified is not an HMAC-MD5 key.
|
||||
|
||||
``-l``
|
||||
.. option:: -l
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets local-host only mode, which sets the server address to localhost
|
||||
(disabling the ``server`` so that the server address cannot be
|
||||
overridden). Connections to the local server use a TSIG key
|
||||
|
|
@ -102,26 +110,32 @@ Options
|
|||
``update-policy`` to ``local``. The location of this key file can be
|
||||
overridden with the ``-k`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-L level``
|
||||
.. option:: -L level
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the logging debug level. If zero, logging is disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the port to use for connections to a name server. The default is
|
||||
53.
|
||||
|
||||
``-P``
|
||||
.. option:: -P
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the list of private BIND-specific resource record types whose
|
||||
format is understood by ``nsupdate``. See also the ``-T`` option.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r udpretries``
|
||||
.. option:: -r udpretries
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the number of UDP retries. The default is 3. If zero, only one update
|
||||
request is made.
|
||||
|
||||
``-t timeout``
|
||||
.. option:: -t timeout
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the maximum time an update request can take before it is aborted. The
|
||||
default is 300 seconds. If zero, the timeout is disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
``-T``
|
||||
.. option:: -T
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the list of IANA standard resource record types whose format is
|
||||
understood by ``nsupdate``. ``nsupdate`` exits after the lists
|
||||
are printed. The ``-T`` option can be combined with the ``-P``
|
||||
|
|
@ -132,21 +146,25 @@ Options
|
|||
present, is parsed using the UNKNOWN rdata format, (<backslash>
|
||||
<hash> <space> <length> <space> <hexstring>).
|
||||
|
||||
``-u udptimeout``
|
||||
.. option:: -u udptimeout
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the UDP retry interval. The default is 3 seconds. If zero, the
|
||||
interval is computed from the timeout interval and number of UDP
|
||||
retries.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies that TCP should be used even for small update requests. By default, ``nsupdate`` uses
|
||||
UDP to send update requests to the name server unless they are too
|
||||
large to fit in a UDP request, in which case TCP is used. TCP may
|
||||
be preferable when a batch of update requests is made.
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the version number and exits.
|
||||
|
||||
``-y [hmac:]keyname:secret``
|
||||
.. option:: -y [hmac:]keyname:secret
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the literal TSIG authentication key. ``keyname`` is the name of the key,
|
||||
and ``secret`` is the base64 encoded shared secret. ``hmac`` is the
|
||||
name of the key algorithm; valid choices are ``hmac-md5``,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -46,51 +46,62 @@ server and decide what algorithm and key it should use.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates use of IPv4 only.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates use of IPv6 only.
|
||||
|
||||
``-b source-address``
|
||||
.. option:: -b source-address
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates ``source-address`` as the source address for the connection to the
|
||||
server. Multiple instances are permitted, to allow setting of both the
|
||||
IPv4 and IPv6 source addresses.
|
||||
|
||||
``-c config-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -c config-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates ``config-file`` as the configuration file instead of the default,
|
||||
|rndc_conf|.
|
||||
|
||||
``-k key-file``
|
||||
.. option:: -k key-file
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates ``key-file`` as the key file instead of the default,
|
||||
|rndc_key|. The key in |rndc_key| is used to
|
||||
authenticate commands sent to the server if the config-file does not
|
||||
exist.
|
||||
|
||||
``-s server``
|
||||
.. option:: -s server
|
||||
|
||||
``server`` is the name or address of the server which matches a server
|
||||
statement in the configuration file for ``rndc``. If no server is
|
||||
supplied on the command line, the host named by the default-server
|
||||
clause in the options statement of the ``rndc`` configuration file
|
||||
is used.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port
|
||||
|
||||
This option instructs BIND 9 to send commands to TCP port ``port`` instead of its default control
|
||||
channel port, 953.
|
||||
|
||||
``-q``
|
||||
.. option:: -q
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, where message text returned by the server is not printed
|
||||
unless there is an error.
|
||||
|
||||
``-r``
|
||||
.. option:: -r
|
||||
|
||||
This option instructs ``rndc`` to print the result code returned by ``named``
|
||||
after executing the requested command (e.g., ISC_R_SUCCESS,
|
||||
ISC_R_FAILURE, etc.).
|
||||
|
||||
``-V``
|
||||
.. option:: -V
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables verbose logging.
|
||||
|
||||
``-y key_id``
|
||||
.. option:: -y key_id
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates use of the key ``key_id`` from the configuration file. For control message validation to succeed, ``key_id`` must be known
|
||||
by ``named`` with the same algorithm and secret string. If no ``key_id`` is specified,
|
||||
``rndc`` first looks for a key clause in the server statement of
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,7 +119,8 @@ without arguments.
|
|||
|
||||
Currently supported commands are:
|
||||
|
||||
``addzone`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]] *configuration*
|
||||
.. option:: addzone zone [class [view]] configuration
|
||||
|
||||
This command adds a zone while the server is running. This command requires the
|
||||
``allow-new-zones`` option to be set to ``yes``. The configuration
|
||||
string specified on the command line is the zone configuration text
|
||||
|
|
@ -133,7 +145,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc delzone`` and ``rndc modzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``delzone`` [**-clean**] *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: delzone [-clean] zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command deletes a zone while the server is running.
|
||||
|
||||
If the ``-clean`` argument is specified, the zone's master file (and
|
||||
|
|
@ -151,7 +164,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc addzone`` and ``rndc modzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``dnssec`` ( **-status** | **-rollover** **-key** id [**-alg** *algorithm*] [**-when** *time*] | **-checkds** [**-key** *id* [**-alg** *algorithm*]] [**-when** *time*] ( *published* | *withdrawn* )) *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: dnssec (-status | -rollover -key id [-alg algorithm] [-when time] | -checkds [-key id [-alg algorithm]] [-when time] published | withdraw)) zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command allows you to interact with the "dnssec-policy" of a given
|
||||
zone.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -170,7 +184,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
select the correct algorithm). The time that the DS has been published or
|
||||
withdrawn is set to now, unless otherwise specified with the argument ``-when time``.
|
||||
|
||||
``dnstap`` ( **-reopen** | **-roll** [*number*] )
|
||||
.. option:: dnstap (-reopen | -roll [number])
|
||||
|
||||
This command closes and re-opens DNSTAP output files. ``rndc dnstap -reopen`` allows
|
||||
the output file to be renamed externally, so that ``named`` can
|
||||
truncate and re-open it. ``rndc dnstap -roll`` causes the output file
|
||||
|
|
@ -179,25 +194,30 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
output file is moved to ".1", and so on. If ``number`` is specified, then
|
||||
the number of backup log files is limited to that number.
|
||||
|
||||
``dumpdb`` [**-all** | **-cache** | **-zones** | **-adb** | **-bad** | **-expired** | **-fail**] [*view ...*]
|
||||
.. option:: dumpdb [-all | -cache | -zones | -adb | -bad | -expired | -fail] [view ...]
|
||||
|
||||
This command dumps the server's caches (default) and/or zones to the dump file for
|
||||
the specified views. If no view is specified, all views are dumped.
|
||||
(See the ``dump-file`` option in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
|
||||
Manual.)
|
||||
|
||||
``flush``
|
||||
.. option:: flush
|
||||
|
||||
This command flushes the server's cache.
|
||||
|
||||
``flushname`` *name* [*view*]
|
||||
.. option:: flushname name [view]
|
||||
|
||||
This command flushes the given name from the view's DNS cache and, if applicable,
|
||||
from the view's nameserver address database, bad server cache, and
|
||||
SERVFAIL cache.
|
||||
|
||||
``flushtree`` *name* [*view*]
|
||||
.. option:: flushtree name [view]
|
||||
|
||||
This command flushes the given name, and all of its subdomains, from the view's
|
||||
DNS cache, address database, bad server cache, and SERVFAIL cache.
|
||||
|
||||
``freeze`` [*zone* [*class* [*view*]]]
|
||||
.. option:: freeze [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command suspends updates to a dynamic zone. If no zone is specified, then all
|
||||
zones are suspended. This allows manual edits to be made to a zone
|
||||
normally updated by dynamic update, and causes changes in the
|
||||
|
|
@ -206,7 +226,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc thaw``.
|
||||
|
||||
``halt`` [**-p**]
|
||||
.. option:: halt [-p]
|
||||
|
||||
This command stops the server immediately. Recent changes made through dynamic
|
||||
update or IXFR are not saved to the master files, but are rolled
|
||||
forward from the journal files when the server is restarted. If
|
||||
|
|
@ -216,7 +237,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc stop``.
|
||||
|
||||
``loadkeys`` [*zone* [*class* [*view*]]]
|
||||
.. option:: loadkeys [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command fetches all DNSSEC keys for the given zone from the key directory. If
|
||||
they are within their publication period, they are merged into the
|
||||
zone's DNSKEY RRset. Unlike ``rndc sign``, however, the zone is not
|
||||
|
|
@ -228,7 +250,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
zone to be configured to allow dynamic DNS. (See "Dynamic Update Policies" in
|
||||
the Administrator Reference Manual for more details.)
|
||||
|
||||
``managed-keys`` (*status* | *refresh* | *sync* | *destroy*) [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: managed-keys (status | refresh | sync | destroy) [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command inspects and controls the "managed-keys" database which handles
|
||||
:rfc:`5011` DNSSEC trust anchor maintenance. If a view is specified, these
|
||||
commands are applied to that view; otherwise, they are applied to all
|
||||
|
|
@ -266,7 +289,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
keys in the event of a trust anchor rollover, or as a brute-force
|
||||
repair for key maintenance problems.
|
||||
|
||||
``modzone`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]] *configuration*
|
||||
.. option:: modzone zone [class [view]] configuration
|
||||
|
||||
This command modifies the configuration of a zone while the server is running. This
|
||||
command requires the ``allow-new-zones`` option to be set to ``yes``.
|
||||
As with ``addzone``, the configuration string specified on the
|
||||
|
|
@ -284,15 +308,18 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc addzone`` and ``rndc delzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``notify`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: notify zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command resends NOTIFY messages for the zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``notrace``
|
||||
.. option:: notrace
|
||||
|
||||
This command sets the server's debugging level to 0.
|
||||
|
||||
See also ``rndc trace``.
|
||||
|
||||
``nta`` [( **-class** *class* | **-dump** | **-force** | **-remove** | **-lifetime** *duration*)] *domain* [*view*]
|
||||
.. option:: nta [(-class class | -dump | -force | -remove | -lifetime duration)] domain [view]
|
||||
|
||||
This command sets a DNSSEC negative trust anchor (NTA) for ``domain``, with a
|
||||
lifetime of ``duration``. The default lifetime is configured in
|
||||
``named.conf`` via the ``nta-lifetime`` option, and defaults to one
|
||||
|
|
@ -343,7 +370,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
view name that begins with a hyphen, use a double-hyphen (--) on the
|
||||
command line to indicate the end of options.
|
||||
|
||||
``querylog`` [(*on* | *off*)]
|
||||
.. option:: querylog [(on | off)]
|
||||
|
||||
This command enables or disables query logging. For backward compatibility, this
|
||||
command can also be used without an argument to toggle query logging
|
||||
on and off.
|
||||
|
|
@ -353,13 +381,15 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
of ``named.conf``, or by specifying ``querylog yes;`` in the
|
||||
``options`` section of ``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
``reconfig``
|
||||
.. option:: reconfig
|
||||
|
||||
This command reloads the configuration file and loads new zones, but does not reload
|
||||
existing zone files even if they have changed. This is faster than a
|
||||
full ``reload`` when there is a large number of zones, because it
|
||||
avoids the need to examine the modification times of the zone files.
|
||||
|
||||
``recursing``
|
||||
.. option:: recursing
|
||||
|
||||
This command dumps the list of queries ``named`` is currently
|
||||
recursing on, and the list of domains to which iterative queries
|
||||
are currently being sent.
|
||||
|
|
@ -379,16 +409,20 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
and the next time a fetch is sent to that domain, it is recreated
|
||||
with the counters set to zero).
|
||||
|
||||
``refresh`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: refresh zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command schedules zone maintenance for the given zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``reload``
|
||||
.. option:: reload
|
||||
|
||||
This command reloads the configuration file and zones.
|
||||
|
||||
``reload`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: reload zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command reloads the given zone.
|
||||
|
||||
``retransfer`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: retransfer zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command retransfers the given secondary zone from the primary server.
|
||||
|
||||
If the zone is configured to use ``inline-signing``, the signed
|
||||
|
|
@ -396,12 +430,14 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
unsigned version is complete, the signed version is regenerated
|
||||
with new signatures.
|
||||
|
||||
``scan``
|
||||
.. option:: scan
|
||||
|
||||
This command scans the list of available network interfaces for changes, without
|
||||
performing a full ``reconfig`` or waiting for the
|
||||
``interface-interval`` timer.
|
||||
|
||||
``secroots`` [**-**] [*view* ...]
|
||||
.. option:: secroots [-] [view ...]
|
||||
|
||||
This command dumps the security roots (i.e., trust anchors configured via
|
||||
``trust-anchors``, or the ``managed-keys`` or ``trusted-keys`` statements
|
||||
[both deprecated], or ``dnssec-validation auto``) and negative trust anchors
|
||||
|
|
@ -418,7 +454,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc managed-keys``.
|
||||
|
||||
``serve-stale`` (**on** | **off** | **reset** | **status**) [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: serve-stale (on | off | reset | status) [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command enables, disables, resets, or reports the current status of
|
||||
the serving of stale answers as configured in ``named.conf``.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -430,12 +467,14 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
answers is currently enabled or disabled. It also reports the values of
|
||||
``stale-answer-ttl`` and ``max-stale-ttl``.
|
||||
|
||||
``showzone`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: showzone zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command prints the configuration of a running zone.
|
||||
|
||||
See also ``rndc zonestatus``.
|
||||
|
||||
``sign`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: sign zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command fetches all DNSSEC keys for the given zone from the key directory (see
|
||||
the ``key-directory`` option in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
|
||||
Manual). If they are within their publication period, they are merged into
|
||||
|
|
@ -450,7 +489,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc loadkeys``.
|
||||
|
||||
``signing`` [(**-list** | **-clear** *keyid/algorithm* | **-clear** *all* | **-nsec3param** ( *parameters* | none ) | **-serial** *value* ) *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: signing [(-list | -clear keyid/algorithm | -clear all | -nsec3param (parameters | none) | -serial value) zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command lists, edits, or removes the DNSSEC signing-state records for the
|
||||
specified zone. The status of ongoing DNSSEC operations, such as
|
||||
signing or generating NSEC3 chains, is stored in the zone in the form
|
||||
|
|
@ -495,17 +535,20 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
is rejected. The primary use of this parameter is to set the serial number on inline
|
||||
signed zones.
|
||||
|
||||
``stats``
|
||||
.. option:: stats
|
||||
|
||||
This command writes server statistics to the statistics file. (See the
|
||||
``statistics-file`` option in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
|
||||
Manual.)
|
||||
|
||||
``status``
|
||||
.. option:: status
|
||||
|
||||
This command displays the status of the server. Note that the number of zones includes
|
||||
the internal ``bind/CH`` zone and the default ``./IN`` hint zone, if
|
||||
there is no explicit root zone configured.
|
||||
|
||||
``stop`` **-p**
|
||||
.. option:: stop -p
|
||||
|
||||
This command stops the server, making sure any recent changes made through dynamic
|
||||
update or IXFR are first saved to the master files of the updated
|
||||
zones. If ``-p`` is specified, ``named(8)`'s process ID is returned.
|
||||
|
|
@ -514,12 +557,14 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc halt``.
|
||||
|
||||
``sync`` **-clean** [*zone* [*class* [*view*]]]
|
||||
.. option:: sync -clean [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command syncs changes in the journal file for a dynamic zone to the master
|
||||
file. If the "-clean" option is specified, the journal file is also
|
||||
removed. If no zone is specified, then all zones are synced.
|
||||
|
||||
``tcp-timeouts`` [*initial* *idle* *keepalive* *advertised*]
|
||||
.. option:: tcp-timeouts [initial idle keepalive advertised]
|
||||
|
||||
When called without arguments, this command displays the current values of the
|
||||
``tcp-initial-timeout``, ``tcp-idle-timeout``,
|
||||
``tcp-keepalive-timeout``, and ``tcp-advertised-timeout`` options.
|
||||
|
|
@ -528,7 +573,8 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
denial-of-service (DoS) attack. See the descriptions of these options in the BIND 9
|
||||
Administrator Reference Manual for details of their use.
|
||||
|
||||
``thaw`` [*zone* [*class* [*view*]]]
|
||||
.. option:: thaw [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command enables updates to a frozen dynamic zone. If no zone is specified,
|
||||
then all frozen zones are enabled. This causes the server to reload
|
||||
the zone from disk, and re-enables dynamic updates after the load has
|
||||
|
|
@ -540,31 +586,37 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc freeze``.
|
||||
|
||||
``trace``
|
||||
.. option:: trace
|
||||
|
||||
This command increments the server's debugging level by one.
|
||||
|
||||
``trace`` *level*
|
||||
.. option:: trace level
|
||||
|
||||
This command sets the server's debugging level to an explicit value.
|
||||
|
||||
See also ``rndc notrace``.
|
||||
|
||||
``tsig-delete`` *keyname* [*view*]
|
||||
.. option:: tsig-delete keyname [view]
|
||||
|
||||
This command deletes a given TKEY-negotiated key from the server. This does not
|
||||
apply to statically configured TSIG keys.
|
||||
|
||||
``tsig-list``
|
||||
.. option:: tsig-list
|
||||
|
||||
This command lists the names of all TSIG keys currently configured for use by
|
||||
``named`` in each view. The list includes both statically configured keys and
|
||||
dynamic TKEY-negotiated keys.
|
||||
|
||||
``validation`` (**on** | **off** | **status**) [*view* ...]``
|
||||
.. option:: validation (on | off | status) [view ...]
|
||||
|
||||
This command enables, disables, or checks the current status of DNSSEC validation. By
|
||||
default, validation is enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
The cache is flushed when validation is turned on or off to avoid using data
|
||||
that might differ between states.
|
||||
|
||||
``zonestatus`` *zone* [*class* [*view*]]
|
||||
.. option:: zonestatus zone [class [view]]
|
||||
|
||||
This command displays the current status of the given zone, including the master
|
||||
file name and any include files from which it was loaded, when it was
|
||||
most recently loaded, the current serial number, the number of nodes,
|
||||
|
|
@ -574,7 +626,7 @@ Currently supported commands are:
|
|||
|
||||
See also ``rndc showzone``.
|
||||
|
||||
``rndc`` commands that specify zone names, such as ``reload``,
|
||||
``rndc`` commands that specify zone names, such as ``reload``
|
||||
``retransfer``, or ``zonestatus``, can be ambiguous when applied to zones
|
||||
of type ``redirect``. Redirect zones are always called ``.``, and can be
|
||||
confused with zones of type ``hint`` or with secondary copies of the root
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -32,18 +32,22 @@ longer and more detailed YAML format is used.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-m``
|
||||
.. option:: -m
|
||||
|
||||
This option indicates trace memory allocations, and is used for debugging memory leaks.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p``
|
||||
.. option:: -p
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints the text form of the DNS
|
||||
message that was encapsulated in the ``dnstap`` frame, after printing the ``dnstap`` data.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x``
|
||||
.. option:: -x
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints a hex dump of the wire form
|
||||
of the DNS message that was encapsulated in the ``dnstap`` frame, after printing the ``dnstap`` data.
|
||||
|
||||
``-y``
|
||||
.. option:: -y
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints ``dnstap`` data in a detailed YAML format.
|
||||
|
||||
See Also
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -60,39 +60,47 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
Anywhere Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-f``
|
||||
.. option:: -f
|
||||
|
||||
This option makes ``mdig`` operate in batch mode by reading a list
|
||||
of lookup requests to process from the file ``filename``. The file
|
||||
contains a number of queries, one per line. Each entry in the file
|
||||
should be organized in the same way they would be presented as queries
|
||||
to ``mdig`` using the command-line interface.
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option causes ``mdig`` to print detailed help information, with the full list
|
||||
of options, and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
``-v``
|
||||
.. option:: -v
|
||||
|
||||
This option causes ``mdig`` to print the version number and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
Global Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-4``
|
||||
.. option:: -4
|
||||
|
||||
This option forces ``mdig`` to only use IPv4 query transport.
|
||||
|
||||
``-6``
|
||||
.. option:: -6
|
||||
|
||||
This option forces ``mdig`` to only use IPv6 query transport.
|
||||
|
||||
``-b address``
|
||||
.. option:: -b address
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the source IP address of the query to
|
||||
``address``. This must be a valid address on one of the host's network
|
||||
interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::". An optional port may be specified by
|
||||
appending "#<port>"
|
||||
|
||||
``-m``
|
||||
.. option:: -m
|
||||
|
||||
This option enables memory usage debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p port#``
|
||||
.. option:: -p port#
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used when a non-standard port number is to be
|
||||
queried. ``port#`` is the port number that ``mdig`` sends its
|
||||
queries to, instead of the standard DNS port number 53. This option is
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,39 +109,49 @@ Global Options
|
|||
|
||||
The global query options are:
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]additional``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]additional
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the additional section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]all``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]all
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets or clears all display flags.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]answer``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]answer
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
|
||||
is to display it.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]authority``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]authority
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the authority section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]besteffort``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]besteffort
|
||||
|
||||
This option attempts to display [or does not display] the contents of messages which are malformed. The
|
||||
default is to not display malformed answers.
|
||||
|
||||
``+burst``
|
||||
.. option:: +burst
|
||||
|
||||
This option delays queries until the start of the next second.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cl``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cl
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]comments``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]comments
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
|
||||
print comments.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]continue``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]continue
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles continuation on errors (e.g. timeouts).
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]crypto``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]crypto
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
|
||||
contents of these fields are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
|
||||
validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,50 +159,60 @@ The global query options are:
|
|||
they are replaced by the string "[omitted]"; in the DNSKEY case, the
|
||||
key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g., ``[ key id = value ]``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+dscp[=value]``
|
||||
.. option:: +dscp[=value]
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the DSCP code point to be used when sending the query. Valid DSCP
|
||||
code points are in the range [0...63]. By default no code point is
|
||||
explicitly set.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]multiline``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]multiline
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles printing of records, like the SOA records, in a verbose multi-line format
|
||||
with human-readable comments. The default is to print each record on
|
||||
a single line, to facilitate machine parsing of the ``mdig`` output.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]question``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]question
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints [or does not print] the question section of a query when an answer
|
||||
is returned. The default is to print the question section as a
|
||||
comment.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]rrcomments``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]rrcomments
|
||||
|
||||
This option toggles the display of per-record comments in the output (for example,
|
||||
human-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
|
||||
not to print record comments unless multiline mode is active.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]short``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]short
|
||||
|
||||
This option provides [or does not provide] a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a
|
||||
verbose form.
|
||||
|
||||
``+split=W``
|
||||
.. option:: +split=W
|
||||
|
||||
This option splits long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource records into
|
||||
chunks of ``W`` characters (where ``W`` is rounded up to the nearest
|
||||
multiple of 4). ``+nosplit`` or ``+split=0`` causes fields not to be
|
||||
split. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
|
||||
multiline mode is active.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]tcp``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]tcp
|
||||
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default behavior
|
||||
is to use UDP.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ttlid``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ttlid
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL when printing the record.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ttlunits``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ttlunits
|
||||
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL in friendly human-readable time
|
||||
units of "s", "m", "h", "d", and "w", representing seconds, minutes,
|
||||
hours, days, and weeks. This implies +ttlid.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]vc``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]vc
|
||||
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
|
||||
syntax to ``+[no]tcp`` is provided for backwards compatibility. The
|
||||
``vc`` stands for "virtual circuit".
|
||||
|
|
@ -192,18 +220,21 @@ The global query options are:
|
|||
Local Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-c class``
|
||||
.. option:: -c class
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the query class to ``class``. It can be any valid
|
||||
query class which is supported in BIND 9. The default query class is
|
||||
"IN".
|
||||
|
||||
``-t type``
|
||||
.. option:: -t type
|
||||
|
||||
This option sets the query type to ``type``. It can be any valid
|
||||
query type which is supported in BIND 9. The default query type is "A",
|
||||
unless the ``-x`` option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup with
|
||||
the "PTR" query type.
|
||||
|
||||
``-x addr``
|
||||
.. option:: -x addr
|
||||
|
||||
Reverse lookups - mapping addresses to names - are simplified by
|
||||
this option. ``addr`` is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal
|
||||
notation, or a colon-delimited IPv6 address. ``mdig`` automatically
|
||||
|
|
@ -214,13 +245,16 @@ Local Options
|
|||
|
||||
The local query options are:
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]aaflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]aaflag
|
||||
|
||||
This is a synonym for ``+[no]aaonly``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]aaonly``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]aaonly
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the ``aa`` flag in the query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]adflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]adflag
|
||||
|
||||
This sets [or does not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to return whether all of the answer and authority
|
||||
sections have all been validated as secure, according to the security
|
||||
|
|
@ -229,59 +263,71 @@ The local query options are:
|
|||
indicates that some part of the answer was insecure or not validated.
|
||||
This bit is set by default.
|
||||
|
||||
``+bufsize=B``
|
||||
.. option:: +bufsize=B
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to ``B``
|
||||
bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are 65535 and 0
|
||||
respectively. Values outside this range are rounded up or down
|
||||
appropriately. Values other than zero cause a EDNS query to be
|
||||
sent.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cdflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cdflag
|
||||
|
||||
This sets [or does not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]cookie=####``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]cookie=####
|
||||
|
||||
This sends [or does not send] a COOKIE EDNS option, with an optional value. Replaying a COOKIE
|
||||
from a previous response allows the server to identify a previous
|
||||
client. The default is ``+nocookie``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]dnssec``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]dnssec
|
||||
|
||||
This requests that DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK (DO) bit in
|
||||
the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]edns[=#]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]edns[=#]
|
||||
|
||||
This specifies [or does not specify] the EDNS version to query with. Valid values are 0 to 255.
|
||||
Setting the EDNS version causes an EDNS query to be sent.
|
||||
``+noedns`` clears the remembered EDNS version. EDNS is set to 0 by
|
||||
default.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ednsflags[=#]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ednsflags[=#]
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the must-be-zero EDNS flag bits (Z bits) to the specified value.
|
||||
Decimal, hex, and octal encodings are accepted. Setting a named flag
|
||||
(e.g. DO) is silently ignored. By default, no Z bits are set.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]
|
||||
|
||||
This specifies [or does not specify] an EDNS option with code point ``code`` and an optional payload
|
||||
of ``value`` as a hexadecimal string. ``+noednsopt`` clears the EDNS
|
||||
options to be sent.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]expire``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]expire
|
||||
|
||||
This toggles sending of an EDNS Expire option.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]nsid``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]nsid
|
||||
|
||||
This toggles inclusion of an EDNS name server ID request when sending a query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]recurse``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]recurse
|
||||
|
||||
This toggles the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
|
||||
This bit is set by default, which means ``mdig`` normally sends
|
||||
recursive queries.
|
||||
|
||||
``+retry=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +retry=T
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to ``T``
|
||||
instead of the default, 2. Unlike ``+tries``, this does not include
|
||||
the initial query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]subnet=addr[/prefix-length]``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]subnet=addr[/prefix-length]
|
||||
|
||||
This sends [or does not send] an EDNS Client Subnet option with the specified IP
|
||||
address or network prefix.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -290,29 +336,35 @@ The local query options are:
|
|||
prefix-length of zero, which signals a resolver that the client's
|
||||
address information must *not* be used when resolving this query.
|
||||
|
||||
``+timeout=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +timeout=T
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the timeout for a query to ``T`` seconds. The default timeout is
|
||||
5 seconds for UDP transport and 10 for TCP. An attempt to set ``T``
|
||||
to less than 1 results in a query timeout of 1 second being
|
||||
applied.
|
||||
|
||||
``+tries=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +tries=T
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the number of times to try UDP queries to server to ``T``
|
||||
instead of the default, 3. If ``T`` is less than or equal to zero,
|
||||
the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1.
|
||||
|
||||
``+udptimeout=T``
|
||||
.. option:: +udptimeout=T
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the timeout between UDP query retries to ``T``.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]unknownformat``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]unknownformat
|
||||
|
||||
This prints [or does not print] all RDATA in unknown RR-type presentation format (see :rfc:`3597`).
|
||||
The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type's
|
||||
presentation format.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]yaml``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]yaml
|
||||
|
||||
This toggles printing of the responses in a detailed YAML format.
|
||||
|
||||
``+[no]zflag``
|
||||
.. option:: +[no]zflag
|
||||
|
||||
This sets [or does not set] the last unassigned DNS header flag in a DNS query.
|
||||
This flag is off by default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -33,7 +33,8 @@ version of BIND to an older version.
|
|||
Arguments
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``filename``
|
||||
.. option:: filename
|
||||
|
||||
This is the name of the ``.nzd`` file whose contents should be printed.
|
||||
|
||||
See Also
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -30,22 +30,27 @@ input and checks whether it is syntactically correct.
|
|||
Options
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``-h``
|
||||
.. option:: -h
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints out the help menu.
|
||||
|
||||
``-o origin``
|
||||
.. option:: -o origin
|
||||
|
||||
This option specifies the origin to be used when interpreting
|
||||
the record.
|
||||
|
||||
``-p``
|
||||
.. option:: -p
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints out the resulting record in canonical form. If there
|
||||
is no canonical form defined, the record is printed in unknown
|
||||
record format.
|
||||
|
||||
``-u``
|
||||
.. option:: -u
|
||||
|
||||
This option prints out the resulting record in unknown record form.
|
||||
|
||||
``-C``, ``-T``, and ``-P``
|
||||
.. option:: -C, -T, -P
|
||||
|
||||
These options print out the known class, standard type,
|
||||
and private type mnemonics, respectively.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,22 +39,27 @@ into a command line to confirm the correctness of an NSEC3 hash.
|
|||
Arguments
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
|
||||
``salt``
|
||||
.. option:: salt
|
||||
|
||||
This is the salt provided to the hash algorithm.
|
||||
|
||||
``algorithm``
|
||||
.. option:: algorithm
|
||||
|
||||
This is a number indicating the hash algorithm. Currently the only supported
|
||||
hash algorithm for NSEC3 is SHA-1, which is indicated by the number
|
||||
1; consequently "1" is the only useful value for this argument.
|
||||
|
||||
``flags``
|
||||
.. option:: flags
|
||||
|
||||
This is provided for compatibility with NSEC3 record presentation format, but
|
||||
is ignored since the flags do not affect the hash.
|
||||
|
||||
``iterations``
|
||||
.. option:: iterations
|
||||
|
||||
This is the number of additional times the hash should be performed.
|
||||
|
||||
``domain``
|
||||
.. option:: domain
|
||||
|
||||
This is the domain name to be hashed.
|
||||
|
||||
See Also
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -54,37 +54,47 @@ be used from a remote system.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-a algorithm
|
||||
This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available
|
||||
choices are: hmac\-md5, hmac\-sha1, hmac\-sha224, hmac\-sha256, hmac\-sha384,
|
||||
and hmac\-sha512. The default is hmac\-sha256. Options are
|
||||
case\-insensitive, and the "hmac\-" prefix may be omitted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of options and arguments.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k keyname\fP
|
||||
.B \-k keyname
|
||||
This option specifies the key name of the DDNS authentication key. The
|
||||
default is \fBddns\-key\fP when neither the \fB\-s\fP nor \fB\-z\fP option is
|
||||
specified; otherwise, the default is \fBddns\-key\fP as a separate label
|
||||
followed by the argument of the option, e.g., \fBddns\-key.example.com.\fP
|
||||
The key name must have the format of a valid domain name, consisting of
|
||||
letters, digits, hyphens, and periods.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option enables quiet mode, which prints only the key, with no
|
||||
explanatory text or usage examples. This is essentially identical to
|
||||
\fBtsig\-keygen\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s name\fP
|
||||
.B \-s name
|
||||
This option generates a configuration example to allow dynamic updates
|
||||
of a single hostname. The example \fBnamed.conf\fP text shows how to set
|
||||
an update policy for the specified name using the "name" nametype. The
|
||||
default key name is \fBddns\-key.name\fP\&. Note that the "self" nametype
|
||||
cannot be used, since the name to be updated may differ from the key
|
||||
name. This option cannot be used with the \fB\-z\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-z zone\fP
|
||||
.B \-z zone
|
||||
This option generates a configuration example to allow
|
||||
dynamic updates of a zone. The example \fBnamed.conf\fP text shows how
|
||||
to set an update policy for the specified zone using the "zonesub"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
138
doc/man/delv.1in
138
doc/man/delv.1in
|
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ delv @server name type
|
|||
where:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBserver\fP
|
||||
.B server
|
||||
is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an
|
||||
IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in
|
||||
colon\-delimited notation. When the supplied \fBserver\fP argument is a
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,11 +99,15 @@ options is in use, then only addresses for the corresponding
|
|||
transport are tried. If no usable addresses are found, \fBdelv\fP
|
||||
sends queries to the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4, ::1
|
||||
for IPv6).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBname\fP
|
||||
.B name
|
||||
is the domain name to be looked up.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtype\fP
|
||||
.B type
|
||||
indicates what type of query is required \- ANY, A, MX, etc.
|
||||
\fBtype\fP can be any valid query type. If no \fBtype\fP argument is
|
||||
supplied, \fBdelv\fP performs a lookup for an A record.
|
||||
|
|
@ -111,7 +115,7 @@ supplied, \fBdelv\fP performs a lookup for an A record.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a anchor\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-a anchor\-file
|
||||
This option specifies a file from which to read DNSSEC trust anchors. The default
|
||||
is \fB@sysconfdir@/bind.keys\fP, which is included with BIND 9 and contains one
|
||||
or more trust anchors for the root zone (".").
|
||||
|
|
@ -126,52 +130,70 @@ supported. \fBdelv\fP does not consult the managed\-keys database maintained by
|
|||
\fBnamed\fP, which means that if either of the keys in \fB@sysconfdir@/bind.keys\fP is
|
||||
revoked and rolled over, \fB@sysconfdir@/bind.keys\fP must be updated to
|
||||
use DNSSEC validation in \fBdelv\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-b address\fP
|
||||
.B \-b address
|
||||
This option sets the source IP address of the query to \fBaddress\fP\&. This must be
|
||||
a valid address on one of the host\(aqs network interfaces, or \fB0.0.0.0\fP,
|
||||
or \fB::\fP\&. An optional source port may be specified by appending
|
||||
\fB#<port>\fP
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option sets the query class for the requested data. Currently, only class
|
||||
"IN" is supported in \fBdelv\fP and any other value is ignored.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d level\fP
|
||||
.B \-d level
|
||||
This option sets the systemwide debug level to \fBlevel\fP\&. The allowed range is
|
||||
from 0 to 99. The default is 0 (no debugging). Debugging traces from
|
||||
\fBdelv\fP become more verbose as the debug level increases. See the
|
||||
\fB+mtrace\fP, \fB+rtrace\fP, and \fB+vtrace\fP options below for
|
||||
additional debugging details.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option displays the \fBdelv\fP help usage output and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i\fP
|
||||
.B \-i
|
||||
This option sets insecure mode, which disables internal DNSSEC validation. (Note,
|
||||
however, that this does not set the CD bit on upstream queries. If the
|
||||
server being queried is performing DNSSEC validation, then it does
|
||||
not return invalid data; this can cause \fBdelv\fP to time out. When it
|
||||
is necessary to examine invalid data to debug a DNSSEC problem, use
|
||||
\fBdig +cd\fP\&.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m\fP
|
||||
.B \-m
|
||||
This option enables memory usage debugging.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port#\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port#
|
||||
This option specifies a destination port to use for queries, instead of the
|
||||
standard DNS port number 53. This option is used with a name
|
||||
server that has been configured to listen for queries on a
|
||||
non\-standard port number.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q name\fP
|
||||
.B \-q name
|
||||
This option sets the query name to \fBname\fP\&. While the query name can be
|
||||
specified without using the \fB\-q\fP option, it is sometimes necessary to
|
||||
disambiguate names from types or classes (for example, when looking
|
||||
up the name "ns", which could be misinterpreted as the type NS, or
|
||||
"ch", which could be misinterpreted as class CH).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t type\fP
|
||||
.B \-t type
|
||||
This option sets the query type to \fBtype\fP, which can be any valid query type
|
||||
supported in BIND 9 except for zone transfer types AXFR and IXFR. As
|
||||
with \fB\-q\fP, this is useful to distinguish query\-name types or classes
|
||||
|
|
@ -180,11 +202,15 @@ names from types.
|
|||
.sp
|
||||
The default query type is "A", unless the \fB\-x\fP option is supplied
|
||||
to indicate a reverse lookup, in which case it is "PTR".
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option prints the \fBdelv\fP version and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x addr\fP
|
||||
.B \-x addr
|
||||
This option performs a reverse lookup, mapping an address to a name. \fBaddr\fP
|
||||
is an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation, or a colon\-delimited
|
||||
IPv6 address. When \fB\-x\fP is used, there is no need to provide the
|
||||
|
|
@ -192,11 +218,15 @@ IPv6 address. When \fB\-x\fP is used, there is no need to provide the
|
|||
lookup for a name like \fB11.12.13.10.in\-addr.arpa\fP and sets the
|
||||
query type to PTR. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format
|
||||
under the IP6.ARPA domain.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option forces \fBdelv\fP to only use IPv4.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option forces \fBdelv\fP to only use IPv6.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH QUERY OPTIONS
|
||||
|
|
@ -211,7 +241,7 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
\fB+keyword=value\fP\&. The query options are:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cdflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cdflag
|
||||
This option controls whether to set the CD (checking disabled) bit in queries
|
||||
sent by \fBdelv\fP\&. This may be useful when troubleshooting DNSSEC
|
||||
problems from behind a validating resolver. A validating resolver
|
||||
|
|
@ -219,16 +249,22 @@ blocks invalid responses, making it difficult to retrieve them
|
|||
for analysis. Setting the CD flag on queries causes the resolver
|
||||
to return invalid responses, which \fBdelv\fP can then validate
|
||||
internally and report the errors in detail.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]class\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]class
|
||||
This option controls whether to display the CLASS when printing a record. The
|
||||
default is to display the CLASS.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ttl\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ttl
|
||||
This option controls whether to display the TTL when printing a record. The
|
||||
default is to display the TTL.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]rtrace\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]rtrace
|
||||
This option toggles resolver fetch logging. This reports the name and type of each
|
||||
query sent by \fBdelv\fP in the process of carrying out the resolution
|
||||
and validation process, including the original query
|
||||
|
|
@ -239,8 +275,10 @@ This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 1 in the "resolver"
|
|||
logging category. Setting the systemwide debug level to 1 using the
|
||||
\fB\-d\fP option produces the same output, but affects other
|
||||
logging categories as well.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]mtrace\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]mtrace
|
||||
This option toggles message logging. This produces a detailed dump of the
|
||||
responses received by \fBdelv\fP in the process of carrying out the
|
||||
resolution and validation process.
|
||||
|
|
@ -249,8 +287,10 @@ This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 10 for the "packets"
|
|||
module of the "resolver" logging category. Setting the systemwide
|
||||
debug level to 10 using the \fB\-d\fP option produces the same
|
||||
output, but affects other logging categories as well.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]vtrace\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]vtrace
|
||||
This option toggles validation logging. This shows the internal process of the
|
||||
validator as it determines whether an answer is validly signed,
|
||||
unsigned, or invalid.
|
||||
|
|
@ -259,74 +299,100 @@ This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 3 for the
|
|||
"validator" module of the "dnssec" logging category. Setting the
|
||||
systemwide debug level to 3 using the \fB\-d\fP option produces the
|
||||
same output, but affects other logging categories as well.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]short\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]short
|
||||
This option toggles between verbose and terse answers. The default is to print the answer in a
|
||||
verbose form.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]comments\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]comments
|
||||
This option toggles the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
|
||||
print comments.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]rrcomments\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]rrcomments
|
||||
This option toggles the display of per\-record comments in the output (for example,
|
||||
human\-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
|
||||
to print per\-record comments.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]crypto\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]crypto
|
||||
This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
|
||||
contents of these fields are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
|
||||
validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
|
||||
common failures. The default is to display the fields. When omitted,
|
||||
they are replaced by the string \fB[omitted]\fP or, in the DNSKEY case, the
|
||||
key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g. \fB[ key id = value ]\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]trust\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]trust
|
||||
This option controls whether to display the trust level when printing a record.
|
||||
The default is to display the trust level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]split[=W]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]split[=W]
|
||||
This option splits long hex\- or base64\-formatted fields in resource records into
|
||||
chunks of \fBW\fP characters (where \fBW\fP is rounded up to the nearest
|
||||
multiple of 4). \fB+nosplit\fP or \fB+split=0\fP causes fields not to be
|
||||
split at all. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
|
||||
multiline mode is active.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]all\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]all
|
||||
This option sets or clears the display options \fB+[no]comments\fP,
|
||||
\fB+[no]rrcomments\fP, and \fB+[no]trust\fP as a group.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]multiline\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]multiline
|
||||
This option prints long records (such as RRSIG, DNSKEY, and SOA records) in a
|
||||
verbose multi\-line format with human\-readable comments. The default
|
||||
is to print each record on a single line, to facilitate machine
|
||||
parsing of the \fBdelv\fP output.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]dnssec\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]dnssec
|
||||
This option indicates whether to display RRSIG records in the \fBdelv\fP output.
|
||||
The default is to do so. Note that (unlike in \fBdig\fP) this does
|
||||
\fInot\fP control whether to request DNSSEC records or to
|
||||
validate them. DNSSEC records are always requested, and validation
|
||||
always occurs unless suppressed by the use of \fB\-i\fP or
|
||||
\fB+noroot\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]root[=ROOT]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]root[=ROOT]
|
||||
This option indicates whether to perform conventional DNSSEC validation, and if so,
|
||||
specifies the name of a trust anchor. The default is to validate using a
|
||||
trust anchor of "." (the root zone), for which there is a built\-in key. If
|
||||
specifying a different trust anchor, then \fB\-a\fP must be used to specify a
|
||||
file containing the key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]tcp\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]tcp
|
||||
This option controls whether to use TCP when sending queries. The default is to
|
||||
use UDP unless a truncated response has been received.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]unknownformat\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]unknownformat
|
||||
This option prints all RDATA in unknown RR\-type presentation format (\fI\%RFC 3597\fP).
|
||||
The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type\(aqs
|
||||
presentation format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]yaml\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]yaml
|
||||
This option prints response data in YAML format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH FILES
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
374
doc/man/dig.1in
374
doc/man/dig.1in
|
|
@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ dig @server name type
|
|||
where:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBserver\fP
|
||||
.B server
|
||||
is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an
|
||||
IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in
|
||||
colon\-delimited notation. When the supplied \fBserver\fP argument is a
|
||||
|
|
@ -100,11 +100,15 @@ options are in use, then only addresses for the corresponding
|
|||
transport are tried. If no usable addresses are found, \fBdig\fP
|
||||
sends the query to the local host. The reply from the name server
|
||||
that responds is displayed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBname\fP
|
||||
.B name
|
||||
is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtype\fP
|
||||
.B type
|
||||
indicates what type of query is required \- ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
|
||||
\fBtype\fP can be any valid query type. If no \fBtype\fP argument is
|
||||
supplied, \fBdig\fP performs a lookup for an A record.
|
||||
|
|
@ -112,53 +116,73 @@ supplied, \fBdig\fP performs a lookup for an A record.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option indicates that only IPv4 should be used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option indicates that only IPv6 should be used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-b address[#port]\fP
|
||||
.B \-b address[#port]
|
||||
This option sets the source IP address of the query. The \fBaddress\fP must be a
|
||||
valid address on one of the host\(aqs network interfaces, or "0.0.0.0"
|
||||
or "::". An optional port may be specified by appending \fB#port\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option sets the query class. The default \fBclass\fP is IN; other classes are
|
||||
HS for Hesiod records or CH for Chaosnet records.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f file\fP
|
||||
.B \-f file
|
||||
This option sets batch mode, in which \fBdig\fP reads a list of lookup requests to process from
|
||||
the given \fBfile\fP\&. Each line in the file should be organized in the
|
||||
same way it would be presented as a query to \fBdig\fP using the
|
||||
command\-line interface.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k keyfile\fP
|
||||
.B \-k keyfile
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to sign queries using TSIG using a key read from the given file. Key
|
||||
files can be generated using \fBtsig\-keygen\fP\&. When using TSIG
|
||||
authentication with \fBdig\fP, the name server that is queried needs to
|
||||
know the key and algorithm that is being used. In BIND, this is done
|
||||
by providing appropriate \fBkey\fP and \fBserver\fP statements in
|
||||
\fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m\fP
|
||||
.B \-m
|
||||
This option enables memory usage debugging.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port
|
||||
This option sends the query to a non\-standard port on the server, instead of the
|
||||
default port 53. This option is used to test a name server that
|
||||
has been configured to listen for queries on a non\-standard port
|
||||
number.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q name\fP
|
||||
.B \-q name
|
||||
This option specifies the domain name to query. This is useful to distinguish the \fBname\fP
|
||||
from other arguments.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r\fP
|
||||
.B \-r
|
||||
This option indicates that options from \fB${HOME}/.digrc\fP should not be read. This is useful for
|
||||
scripts that need predictable behavior.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t type\fP
|
||||
.B \-t type
|
||||
This option indicates the resource record type to query, which can be any valid query type. If
|
||||
it is a resource record type supported in BIND 9, it can be given by
|
||||
the type mnemonic (such as \fBNS\fP or \fBAAAA\fP). The default query type is
|
||||
|
|
@ -172,14 +196,20 @@ SOA record was \fBN\fP\&.
|
|||
All resource record types can be expressed as \fBTYPEnn\fP, where \fBnn\fP is
|
||||
the number of the type. If the resource record type is not supported
|
||||
in BIND 9, the result is displayed as described in \fI\%RFC 3597\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u\fP
|
||||
.B \-u
|
||||
This option indicates that print query times should be provided in microseconds instead of milliseconds.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option prints the version number and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x addr\fP
|
||||
.B \-x addr
|
||||
This option sets simplified reverse lookups, for mapping addresses to names. The
|
||||
\fBaddr\fP is an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation, or a
|
||||
colon\-delimited IPv6 address. When the \fB\-x\fP option is used, there is no
|
||||
|
|
@ -188,8 +218,10 @@ need to provide the \fBname\fP, \fBclass\fP, and \fBtype\fP arguments.
|
|||
\fB94.2.0.192.in\-addr.arpa\fP and sets the query type and class to PTR
|
||||
and IN respectively. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format
|
||||
under the IP6.ARPA domain.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-y [hmac:]keyname:secret\fP
|
||||
.B \-y [hmac:]keyname:secret
|
||||
This option signs queries using TSIG with the given authentication key.
|
||||
\fBkeyname\fP is the name of the key, and \fBsecret\fP is the
|
||||
base64\-encoded shared secret. \fBhmac\fP is the name of the key algorithm;
|
||||
|
|
@ -225,17 +257,23 @@ abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, \fB+cd\fP is equivalent to
|
|||
\fB+cdflag\fP\&. The query options are:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]aaflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]aaflag
|
||||
This option is a synonym for \fB+[no]aaonly\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]aaonly\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]aaonly
|
||||
This option sets the \fBaa\fP flag in the query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]additional\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]additional
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the additional section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]adflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]adflag
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to return whether all of the answer and authority
|
||||
sections have been validated as secure, according to the security
|
||||
|
|
@ -243,45 +281,65 @@ policy of the server. \fBAD=1\fP indicates that all records have been
|
|||
validated as secure and the answer is not from a OPT\-OUT range. \fBAD=0\fP
|
||||
indicates that some part of the answer was insecure or not validated.
|
||||
This bit is set by default.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]all\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]all
|
||||
This option sets or clears all display flags.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]answer\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]answer
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
|
||||
is to display it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]authority\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]authority
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the authority section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]badcookie\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]badcookie
|
||||
This option retries the lookup with a new server cookie if a BADCOOKIE response is
|
||||
received.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]besteffort\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]besteffort
|
||||
This option attempts to display the contents of messages which are malformed. The
|
||||
default is to not display malformed answers.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+bufsize[=B]\fP
|
||||
.B +bufsize[=B]
|
||||
This option sets the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
|
||||
\fBB\fP bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are 65535 and
|
||||
0, respectively. \fB+bufsize\fP restores the default buffer size.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cdflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cdflag
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]class\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]class
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cmd\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cmd
|
||||
This option toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output, identifying the
|
||||
version of \fBdig\fP and the query options that have been applied. This option
|
||||
always has a global effect; it cannot be set globally and then overridden on a
|
||||
per\-lookup basis. The default is to print this comment.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]comments\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]comments
|
||||
This option toggles the display of some comment lines in the output, with
|
||||
information about the packet header and OPT pseudosection, and the names of
|
||||
the response section. The default is to print these comments.
|
||||
|
|
@ -289,79 +347,109 @@ the response section. The default is to print these comments.
|
|||
Other types of comments in the output are not affected by this option, but
|
||||
can be controlled using other command\-line switches. These include
|
||||
\fB+[no]cmd\fP, \fB+[no]question\fP, \fB+[no]stats\fP, and \fB+[no]rrcomments\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cookie=####\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cookie=####
|
||||
This option sends [or does not send] a COOKIE EDNS option, with an optional value. Replaying a COOKIE
|
||||
from a previous response allows the server to identify a previous
|
||||
client. The default is \fB+cookie\fP\&.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\fB+cookie\fP is also set when \fB+trace\fP is set to better emulate the
|
||||
default queries from a nameserver.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]crypto\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]crypto
|
||||
This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
|
||||
contents of these fields are unnecessary for debugging most DNSSEC
|
||||
validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
|
||||
common failures. The default is to display the fields. When omitted,
|
||||
they are replaced by the string \fB[omitted]\fP or, in the DNSKEY case, the
|
||||
key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g. \fB[ key id = value ]\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]defname\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]defname
|
||||
This option, which is deprecated, is treated as a synonym for \fB+[no]search\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]dns64prefix\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]dns64prefix
|
||||
Lookup IPV4ONLY.ARPA AAAA and print any DNS64 prefixes found.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]dnssec\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]dnssec
|
||||
This option requests that DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK (DO) bit in
|
||||
the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+domain=somename\fP
|
||||
.B +domain=somename
|
||||
This option sets the search list to contain the single domain \fBsomename\fP, as if
|
||||
specified in a \fBdomain\fP directive in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP, and
|
||||
enables search list processing as if the \fB+search\fP option were
|
||||
given.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+dscp=value\fP
|
||||
.B +dscp=value
|
||||
This option sets the DSCP code point to be used when sending the query. Valid DSCP
|
||||
code points are in the range [0...63]. By default no code point is
|
||||
explicitly set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]edns[=#]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]edns[=#]
|
||||
This option specifies the EDNS version to query with. Valid values are 0 to 255.
|
||||
Setting the EDNS version causes an EDNS query to be sent.
|
||||
\fB+noedns\fP clears the remembered EDNS version. EDNS is set to 0 by
|
||||
default.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ednsflags[=#]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ednsflags[=#]
|
||||
This option sets the must\-be\-zero EDNS flags bits (Z bits) to the specified value.
|
||||
Decimal, hex, and octal encodings are accepted. Setting a named flag
|
||||
(e.g., DO) is silently ignored. By default, no Z bits are set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ednsnegotiation\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ednsnegotiation
|
||||
This option enables/disables EDNS version negotiation. By default, EDNS version
|
||||
negotiation is enabled.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]
|
||||
This option specifies the EDNS option with code point \fBcode\fP and an optional payload
|
||||
of \fBvalue\fP as a hexadecimal string. \fBcode\fP can be either an EDNS
|
||||
option name (for example, \fBNSID\fP or \fBECS\fP) or an arbitrary
|
||||
numeric value. \fB+noednsopt\fP clears the EDNS options to be sent.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]expire\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]expire
|
||||
This option sends an EDNS Expire option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]fail\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]fail
|
||||
This option indicates that \fBnamed\fP should try [or not try] the next server if a SERVFAIL is received. The default is
|
||||
to not try the next server, which is the reverse of normal stub
|
||||
resolver behavior.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]header\-only\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]header\-only
|
||||
This option sends a query with a DNS header without a question section. The
|
||||
default is to add a question section. The query type and query name
|
||||
are ignored when this is set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]https[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]https[=value]
|
||||
This option indicates whether to use DNS over HTTPS (DoH) when querying
|
||||
name servers. When this option is in use, the port number defaults to 443.
|
||||
The HTTP POST request mode is used when sending the query.
|
||||
|
|
@ -369,65 +457,91 @@ The HTTP POST request mode is used when sending the query.
|
|||
If \fBvalue\fP is specified, it will be used as the HTTP endpoint in the
|
||||
query URI; the default is \fB/dns\-query\fP\&. So, for example, \fBdig
|
||||
@example.com +https\fP will use the URI \fBhttps://example.com/dns\-query\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]https\-get[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]https\-get[=value]
|
||||
Similar to \fB+https\fP, except that the HTTP GET request mode is used
|
||||
when sending the query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]https\-post[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]https\-post[=value]
|
||||
Same as \fB+https\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]http\-plain[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]http\-plain[=value]
|
||||
Similar to \fB+https\fP, except that HTTP queries will be sent over a
|
||||
non\-encrypted channel. When this option is in use, the port number
|
||||
defaults to 80 and the HTTP request mode is POST.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]http\-plain\-get[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]http\-plain\-get[=value]
|
||||
Similar to \fB+http\-plain\fP, except that the HTTP request mode is GET.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]http\-plain\-post[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]http\-plain\-post[=value]
|
||||
Same as \fB+http\-plain\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]identify\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]identify
|
||||
This option shows [or does not show] the IP address and port number that
|
||||
supplied the answer, when the \fB+short\fP option is enabled. If short
|
||||
form answers are requested, the default is not to show the source
|
||||
address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]idnin\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]idnin
|
||||
This option processes [or does not process] IDN domain names on input. This requires
|
||||
\fBIDN SUPPORT\fP to have been enabled at compile time.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The default is to process IDN input when standard output is a tty.
|
||||
The IDN processing on input is disabled when \fBdig\fP output is redirected
|
||||
to files, pipes, and other non\-tty file descriptors.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]idnout\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]idnout
|
||||
This option converts [or does not convert] puny code on output. This requires
|
||||
\fBIDN SUPPORT\fP to have been enabled at compile time.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The default is to process puny code on output when standard output is
|
||||
a tty. The puny code processing on output is disabled when \fBdig\fP output
|
||||
is redirected to files, pipes, and other non\-tty file descriptors.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ignore\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ignore
|
||||
This option ignores [or does not ignore] truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
|
||||
default, TCP retries are performed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]keepalive\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]keepalive
|
||||
This option sends [or does not send] an EDNS Keepalive option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]keepopen\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]keepopen
|
||||
This option keeps [or does not keep] the TCP socket open between queries, and reuses it rather than
|
||||
creating a new TCP socket for each lookup. The default is
|
||||
\fB+nokeepopen\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]multiline\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]multiline
|
||||
This option prints [or does not print] records, like the SOA records, in a verbose multi\-line format
|
||||
with human\-readable comments. The default is to print each record on
|
||||
a single line to facilitate machine parsing of the \fBdig\fP output.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+ndots=D\fP
|
||||
.B +ndots=D
|
||||
This option sets the number of dots (\fBD\fP) that must appear in \fBname\fP for
|
||||
it to be considered absolute. The default value is that defined using
|
||||
the \fBndots\fP statement in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP, or 1 if no \fBndots\fP
|
||||
|
|
@ -435,25 +549,35 @@ statement is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as
|
|||
relative names, and are searched for in the domains listed in the
|
||||
\fBsearch\fP or \fBdomain\fP directive in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP if
|
||||
\fB+search\fP is set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]nsid\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]nsid
|
||||
When enabled, this option includes an EDNS name server ID request when sending a query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]nssearch\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]nssearch
|
||||
When this option is set, \fBdig\fP attempts to find the authoritative
|
||||
name servers for the zone containing the name being looked up, and
|
||||
display the SOA record that each name server has for the zone.
|
||||
Addresses of servers that did not respond are also printed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]onesoa\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]onesoa
|
||||
When enabled, this option prints only one (starting) SOA record when performing an AXFR. The
|
||||
default is to print both the starting and ending SOA records.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]opcode=value\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]opcode=value
|
||||
When enabled, this option sets (restores) the DNS message opcode to the specified value. The
|
||||
default value is QUERY (0).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+padding=value\fP
|
||||
.B +padding=value
|
||||
This option pads the size of the query packet using the EDNS Padding option to
|
||||
blocks of \fBvalue\fP bytes. For example, \fB+padding=32\fP causes a
|
||||
48\-byte query to be padded to 64 bytes. The default block size is 0,
|
||||
|
|
@ -461,43 +585,61 @@ which disables padding; the maximum is 512. Values are ordinarily
|
|||
expected to be powers of two, such as 128; however, this is not
|
||||
mandatory. Responses to padded queries may also be padded, but only
|
||||
if the query uses TCP or DNS COOKIE.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+qid=value\fP
|
||||
.B +qid=value
|
||||
This option specifies the query ID to use when sending queries.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]qr\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]qr
|
||||
This option toggles the display of the query message as it is sent. By default, the query
|
||||
is not printed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]question\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]question
|
||||
This option toggles the display of the question section of a query when an answer is
|
||||
returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]raflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]raflag
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the RA (Recursion Available) bit in the query. The
|
||||
default is \fB+noraflag\fP\&. This bit is ignored by the server for
|
||||
QUERY.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]rdflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]rdflag
|
||||
This option is a synonym for \fB+[no]recurse\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]recurse\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]recurse
|
||||
This option toggles the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
|
||||
This bit is set by default, which means \fBdig\fP normally sends
|
||||
recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled when the
|
||||
\fB+nssearch\fP or \fB+trace\fP query option is used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+retry=T\fP
|
||||
.B +retry=T
|
||||
This option sets the number of times to retry UDP and TCP queries to server to \fBT\fP
|
||||
instead of the default, 2. Unlike \fB+tries\fP, this does not include
|
||||
the initial query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]rrcomments\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]rrcomments
|
||||
This option toggles the display of per\-record comments in the output (for example,
|
||||
human\-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
|
||||
not to print record comments unless multiline mode is active.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]search\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]search
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
|
||||
directive in \fBresolv.conf\fP, if any. The search list is not used by
|
||||
default.
|
||||
|
|
@ -505,37 +647,51 @@ default.
|
|||
\fBndots\fP from \fBresolv.conf\fP (default 1), which may be overridden by
|
||||
\fB+ndots\fP, determines whether the name is treated as relative
|
||||
and hence whether a search is eventually performed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]short\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]short
|
||||
This option toggles whether a terse answer is provided. The default is to print the answer in a verbose
|
||||
form. This option always has a global effect; it cannot be set globally and
|
||||
then overridden on a per\-lookup basis.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]showbadcookie\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]showbadcookie
|
||||
This option toggles whether to show the message containing the
|
||||
BADCOOKIE rcode before retrying the request or not. The default
|
||||
is to not show the messages.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]showsearch\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]showsearch
|
||||
This option performs [or does not perform] a search showing intermediate results.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]sigchase\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]sigchase
|
||||
This feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use \fBdelv\fP
|
||||
instead.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+split=W\fP
|
||||
.B +split=W
|
||||
This option splits long hex\- or base64\-formatted fields in resource records into
|
||||
chunks of \fBW\fP characters (where \fBW\fP is rounded up to the nearest
|
||||
multiple of 4). \fB+nosplit\fP or \fB+split=0\fP causes fields not to be
|
||||
split at all. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
|
||||
multiline mode is active.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]stats\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]stats
|
||||
This option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query was made, the size of the
|
||||
reply, etc. The default behavior is to print the query statistics as a
|
||||
comment after each lookup.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]subnet=addr[/prefix\-length]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]subnet=addr[/prefix\-length]
|
||||
This option sends [or does not send] an EDNS CLIENT\-SUBNET option with the specified IP
|
||||
address or network prefix.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -543,31 +699,43 @@ address or network prefix.
|
|||
sends an EDNS CLIENT\-SUBNET option with an empty address and a source
|
||||
prefix\-length of zero, which signals a resolver that the client\(aqs
|
||||
address information must \fInot\fP be used when resolving this query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]tcflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]tcflag
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the TC (TrunCation) bit in the query. The default is
|
||||
\fB+notcflag\fP\&. This bit is ignored by the server for QUERY.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]tcp\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]tcp
|
||||
This option indicates whether to use TCP when querying name servers.
|
||||
The default behavior is to use UDP unless a type \fBany\fP or \fBixfr=N\fP
|
||||
query is requested, in which case the default is TCP. AXFR queries
|
||||
always use TCP.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+timeout=T\fP
|
||||
.B +timeout=T
|
||||
This option sets the timeout for a query to \fBT\fP seconds. The default timeout is
|
||||
5 seconds. An attempt to set \fBT\fP to less than 1 is silently set to 1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]tls\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]tls
|
||||
This option indicates whether to use DNS over TLS (DoT) when querying
|
||||
name servers. When this option is in use, the port number defaults
|
||||
to 853.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]topdown\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]topdown
|
||||
This feature is related to \fBdig +sigchase\fP, which is obsolete and
|
||||
has been removed. Use \fBdelv\fP instead.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]trace\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]trace
|
||||
This option toggles tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
|
||||
the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When
|
||||
tracing is enabled, \fBdig\fP makes iterative queries to resolve the
|
||||
|
|
@ -580,39 +748,55 @@ the root zone name servers.
|
|||
.sp
|
||||
\fB+dnssec\fP is also set when \fB+trace\fP is set, to better emulate the
|
||||
default queries from a name server.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+tries=T\fP
|
||||
.B +tries=T
|
||||
This option sets the number of times to try UDP and TCP queries to server to \fBT\fP
|
||||
instead of the default, 3. If \fBT\fP is less than or equal to zero,
|
||||
the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+trusted\-key=####\fP
|
||||
.B +trusted\-key=####
|
||||
This option formerly specified trusted keys for use with \fBdig +sigchase\fP\&. This
|
||||
feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use \fBdelv\fP instead.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ttlid\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ttlid
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL when printing the record.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ttlunits\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ttlunits
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL in friendly human\-readable time
|
||||
units of \fBs\fP, \fBm\fP, \fBh\fP, \fBd\fP, and \fBw\fP, representing seconds, minutes,
|
||||
hours, days, and weeks. This implies \fB+ttlid\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]unknownformat\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]unknownformat
|
||||
This option prints all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format (\fI\%RFC 3597\fP).
|
||||
The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type\(aqs
|
||||
presentation format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]vc\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]vc
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
|
||||
syntax to \fB+[no]tcp\fP is provided for backwards compatibility. The
|
||||
\fBvc\fP stands for "virtual circuit."
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]yaml\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]yaml
|
||||
When enabled, this option prints the responses (and, if \fB+qr\fP is in use, also the
|
||||
outgoing queries) in a detailed YAML format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]zflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]zflag
|
||||
This option sets [or does not set] the last unassigned DNS header flag in a DNS query.
|
||||
This flag is off by default.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ maintain a \fBdsset\-\fP file as well as emit an \fBnsupdate\fP script.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-a algorithm
|
||||
When converting CDS records to DS records, this option specifies
|
||||
the acceptable digest algorithms. This option can be repeated, so
|
||||
that multiple digest types are allowed. If none of the CDS records
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,16 +99,22 @@ are created for each CDNSKEY records.
|
|||
The algorithm must be one of SHA\-1, SHA\-256, or SHA\-384. These values
|
||||
are case\-insensitive, and the hyphen may be omitted. If no algorithm
|
||||
is specified, the default is SHA\-256 only.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class of the zones.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D\fP
|
||||
.B \-D
|
||||
This option generates DS records from CDNSKEY records if both CDS and CDNSKEY
|
||||
records are present in the child zone. By default CDS records are
|
||||
preferred.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d path\fP
|
||||
.B \-d path
|
||||
This specifies the location of the parent DS records. The path can be the name of a file
|
||||
containing the DS records; if it is a directory, \fBdnssec\-cds\fP
|
||||
looks for a \fBdsset\-\fP file for the domain inside the directory.
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,15 +122,19 @@ looks for a \fBdsset\-\fP file for the domain inside the directory.
|
|||
To protect against replay attacks, child records are rejected if they
|
||||
were signed earlier than the modification time of the \fBdsset\-\fP
|
||||
file. This can be adjusted with the \fB\-s\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f child\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-f child\-file
|
||||
This option specifies the file containing the child\(aqs CDS and/or CDNSKEY records, plus its
|
||||
DNSKEY records and the covering RRSIG records, so that they can be
|
||||
authenticated.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The examples below describe how to generate this file.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-iextension\fP
|
||||
.B \-iextension
|
||||
This option updates the \fBdsset\-\fP file in place, instead of writing DS records to
|
||||
the standard output.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -137,8 +147,10 @@ To protect against replay attacks, the modification time of the
|
|||
\fBdsset\-\fP file is set to match the signature inception time of the
|
||||
child records, provided that it is later than the file\(aqs current
|
||||
modification time.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s start\-time\fP
|
||||
.B \-s start\-time
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time after which RRSIG records become
|
||||
acceptable. This can be either an absolute or a relative time. An
|
||||
absolute start time is indicated by a number in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
|
||||
|
|
@ -149,13 +161,17 @@ current time is indicated with \fBnow+N\fP\&.
|
|||
.sp
|
||||
If no start\-time is specified, the modification time of the
|
||||
\fBdsset\-\fP file is used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-T ttl
|
||||
This option specifies a TTL to be used for new DS records. If not specified, the
|
||||
default is the TTL of the old DS records. If they had no explicit TTL,
|
||||
the new DS records also have no explicit TTL.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u\fP
|
||||
.B \-u
|
||||
This option writes an \fBnsupdate\fP script to the standard output, instead of
|
||||
printing the new DS reords. The output is empty if no change is
|
||||
needed.
|
||||
|
|
@ -163,13 +179,19 @@ needed.
|
|||
Note: The TTL of new records needs to be specified: it can be done in the
|
||||
original \fBdsset\-\fP file, with the \fB\-T\fP option, or using the
|
||||
\fBnsupdate\fP \fBttl\fP command.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level. Level 1 is intended to be usefully verbose
|
||||
for general users; higher levels are intended for developers.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBdomain\fP
|
||||
This indicates the name of the delegation point/child zone apex.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -61,13 +61,17 @@ as generated by \fBdnssec\-keygen\fP \fB\-C\fP\&.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-1\fP
|
||||
.B \-1
|
||||
This option is an abbreviation for \fB\-a SHA1\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-2\fP
|
||||
.B \-2
|
||||
This option is an abbreviation for \fB\-a SHA\-256\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-a algorithm
|
||||
This option specifies a digest algorithm to use when converting DNSKEY records to
|
||||
DS records. This option can be repeated, so that multiple DS records
|
||||
are created for each DNSKEY record.
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,20 +79,28 @@ are created for each DNSKEY record.
|
|||
The algorithm must be one of SHA\-1, SHA\-256, or SHA\-384. These values
|
||||
are case\-insensitive, and the hyphen may be omitted. If no algorithm
|
||||
is specified, the default is SHA\-256.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A\fP
|
||||
.B \-A
|
||||
This option indicates that ZSKs are to be included when generating DS records. Without this option, only
|
||||
keys which have the KSK flag set are converted to DS records and
|
||||
printed. This option is only useful in \fB\-f\fP zone file mode.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class; the default is IN. This option is only useful in \fB\-s\fP keyset
|
||||
or \fB\-f\fP zone file mode.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP
|
||||
.B \-C
|
||||
This option generates CDS records rather than DS records.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f file\fP
|
||||
.B \-f file
|
||||
This option sets zone file mode, in which the final dnsname argument of \fBdnssec\-dsfromkey\fP is the
|
||||
DNS domain name of a zone whose master file can be read from
|
||||
\fBfile\fP\&. If the zone name is the same as \fBfile\fP, then it may be
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,24 +111,36 @@ input. This makes it possible to use the output of the \fBdig\fP
|
|||
command as input, as in:
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\fBdig dnskey example.com | dnssec\-dsfromkey \-f \- example.com\fP
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints usage information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option tells BIND 9 to look for key files or \fBkeyset\-\fP files in \fBdirectory\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s\fP
|
||||
.B \-s
|
||||
This option enables keyset mode, in which the final dnsname argument from \fBdnssec\-dsfromkey\fP is the DNS
|
||||
domain name used to locate a \fBkeyset\-\fP file.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T TTL\fP
|
||||
.B \-T TTL
|
||||
This option specifies the TTL of the DS records. By default the TTL is omitted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH EXAMPLE
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ DNSKEY RRset on schedule even if the true private key is stored offline.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f filename\fP
|
||||
.B \-f filename
|
||||
This option indicates the zone file mode. Instead of a public keyfile name, the argument is the
|
||||
DNS domain name of a zone master file, which can be read from
|
||||
\fBfilename\fP\&. If the domain name is the same as \fBfilename\fP, then it may be
|
||||
|
|
@ -59,24 +59,34 @@ omitted.
|
|||
.sp
|
||||
If \fBfilename\fP is set to \fB"\-"\fP, then the zone data is read from the
|
||||
standard input.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-L ttl
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
||||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
place, in which case the existing TTL takes precedence. Setting the default TTL to \fB0\fP or \fBnone\fP
|
||||
removes it from the key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option emits a usage message and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH TIMING OPTIONS
|
||||
|
|
@ -91,21 +101,27 @@ respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
|||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use \fBnone\fP or \fBnever\fP\&.
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ match the name of the zone for which the key is being generated.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-a algorithm
|
||||
This option selects the cryptographic algorithm. The value of \fBalgorithm\fP must
|
||||
be one of RSASHA1, NSEC3RSASHA1, RSASHA256, RSASHA512,
|
||||
ECDSAP256SHA256, ECDSAP384SHA384, ED25519, or ED448.
|
||||
|
|
@ -66,64 +66,88 @@ option, then NSEC3RSASHA1 is used instead.
|
|||
Since BIND 9.12.0, this option is mandatory except when using the
|
||||
\fB\-S\fP option, which copies the algorithm from the predecessory key.
|
||||
Previously, the default for newly generated keys was RSASHA1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-3\fP
|
||||
.B \-3
|
||||
This option uses an NSEC3\-capable algorithm to generate a DNSSEC key. If this
|
||||
option is used with an algorithm that has both NSEC and NSEC3
|
||||
versions, then the NSEC3 version is used; for example,
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-keygen \-3a RSASHA1\fP specifies the NSEC3RSASHA1 algorithm.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually \fBpkcs11\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l label\fP
|
||||
.B \-l label
|
||||
This option specifies the label for a key pair in the crypto hardware.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL\-based PKCS#11 support, the label is
|
||||
an arbitrary string that identifies a particular key. It may be
|
||||
preceded by an optional OpenSSL engine name, followed by a colon, as
|
||||
in \fBpkcs11:keylabel\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-n nametype\fP
|
||||
.B \-n nametype
|
||||
This option specifies the owner type of the key. The value of \fBnametype\fP must
|
||||
either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY
|
||||
(for a key associated with a host (KEY)), USER (for a key associated
|
||||
with a user (KEY)), or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are
|
||||
case\-insensitive.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP
|
||||
.B \-C
|
||||
This option enables compatibility mode, which generates an old\-style key, without any metadata.
|
||||
By default, \fBdnssec\-keyfromlabel\fP includes the key\(aqs creation
|
||||
date in the metadata stored with the private key; other dates may
|
||||
be set there as well, including publication date, activation date, etc. Keys
|
||||
that include this data may be incompatible with older versions of
|
||||
BIND; the \fB\-C\fP option suppresses them.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have the
|
||||
specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f flag\fP
|
||||
.B \-f flag
|
||||
This option sets the specified flag in the \fBflag\fP field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
|
||||
The only recognized flags are KSK (Key\-Signing Key) and REVOKE.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-G\fP
|
||||
.B \-G
|
||||
This option generates a key, but does not publish it or sign with it. This option is
|
||||
incompatible with \fB\-P\fP and \fB\-A\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-keyfromlabel\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to be written.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k\fP
|
||||
.B \-k
|
||||
This option generates KEY records rather than DNSKEY records.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L\fP ttl
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
|
|
@ -131,33 +155,45 @@ DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
|||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
place, in which case the existing TTL would take precedence. Setting
|
||||
the default TTL to \fB0\fP or \fBnone\fP removes it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p protocol\fP
|
||||
.B \-p protocol
|
||||
This option sets the protocol value for the key. The protocol is a number between
|
||||
0 and 255. The default is 3 (DNSSEC). Other possible values for this
|
||||
argument are listed in \fI\%RFC 2535\fP and its successors.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S key\fP
|
||||
.B \-S key
|
||||
This option generates a key as an explicit successor to an existing key. The name,
|
||||
algorithm, size, and type of the key are set to match the
|
||||
predecessor. The activation date of the new key is set to the
|
||||
inactivation date of the existing one. The publication date is
|
||||
set to the activation date minus the prepublication interval, which
|
||||
defaults to 30 days.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t type\fP
|
||||
.B \-t type
|
||||
This option indicates the type of the key. \fBtype\fP must be one of AUTHCONF,
|
||||
NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers
|
||||
to the ability to authenticate data, and CONF to the ability to encrypt
|
||||
data.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-y\fP
|
||||
.B \-y
|
||||
This option allows DNSSEC key files to be generated even if the key ID would
|
||||
collide with that of an existing key, in the event of either key
|
||||
being revoked. (This is only safe to enable if
|
||||
|
|
@ -176,41 +212,55 @@ respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
|||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use \fBnone\fP or \fBnever\fP\&.
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it. If not set, and if the \fB\-G\fP option has not been used, the
|
||||
default is the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-A date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be activated. After that date,
|
||||
the key is included in the zone and used to sign it. If not set,
|
||||
and if the \fB\-G\fP option has not been used, the default is the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-R date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-R date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be revoked. After that date, the
|
||||
key is flagged as revoked. It is included in the zone and
|
||||
is used to sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-I date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-I date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be retired. After that date, the
|
||||
key is still included in the zone, but it is not used to
|
||||
sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i interval\fP
|
||||
.B \-i interval
|
||||
This option sets the prepublication interval for a key. If set, then the
|
||||
publication and activation dates must be separated by at least this
|
||||
much time. If the activation date is specified but the publication
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -46,13 +46,15 @@ generated.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-3\fP
|
||||
.B \-3
|
||||
This option uses an NSEC3\-capable algorithm to generate a DNSSEC key. If this
|
||||
option is used with an algorithm that has both NSEC and NSEC3
|
||||
versions, then the NSEC3 version is selected; for example,
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-keygen \-3a RSASHA1\fP specifies the NSEC3RSASHA1 algorithm.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-a algorithm
|
||||
This option selects the cryptographic algorithm. For DNSSEC keys, the value of
|
||||
\fBalgorithm\fP must be one of RSASHA1, NSEC3RSASHA1, RSASHA256,
|
||||
RSASHA512, ECDSAP256SHA256, ECDSAP384SHA384, ED25519, or ED448. For
|
||||
|
|
@ -70,8 +72,10 @@ option, which copies the algorithm from the predecessor key.
|
|||
In prior releases, HMAC algorithms could be generated for use as TSIG
|
||||
keys, but that feature was removed in BIND 9.13.0. Use
|
||||
\fBtsig\-keygen\fP to generate TSIG keys.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-b keysize\fP
|
||||
.B \-b keysize
|
||||
This option specifies the number of bits in the key. The choice of key size
|
||||
depends on the algorithm used: RSA keys must be between 1024 and 4096
|
||||
bits; Diffie\-Hellman keys must be between 128 and 4096 bits. Elliptic
|
||||
|
|
@ -81,53 +85,73 @@ If the key size is not specified, some algorithms have pre\-defined
|
|||
defaults. For example, RSA keys for use as DNSSEC zone\-signing keys
|
||||
have a default size of 1024 bits; RSA keys for use as key\-signing
|
||||
keys (KSKs, generated with \fB\-f KSK\fP) default to 2048 bits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP
|
||||
.B \-C
|
||||
This option enables compatibility mode, which generates an old\-style key, without any timing
|
||||
metadata. By default, \fBdnssec\-keygen\fP includes the key\(aqs
|
||||
creation date in the metadata stored with the private key; other
|
||||
dates may be set there as well, including publication date, activation date,
|
||||
etc. Keys that include this data may be incompatible with older
|
||||
versions of BIND; the \fB\-C\fP option suppresses them.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have the
|
||||
specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d bits\fP
|
||||
.B \-d bits
|
||||
This option specifies the key size in bits. For the algorithms RSASHA1, NSEC3RSASA1, RSASHA256, and
|
||||
RSASHA512 the key size must be between 1024 and 4096 bits; DH size is between 128
|
||||
and 4096 bits. This option is ignored for algorithms ECDSAP256SHA256,
|
||||
ECDSAP384SHA384, ED25519, and ED448.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually \fBpkcs11\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f flag\fP
|
||||
.B \-f flag
|
||||
This option sets the specified flag in the flag field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
|
||||
The only recognized flags are KSK (Key\-Signing Key) and REVOKE.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-G\fP
|
||||
.B \-G
|
||||
This option generates a key, but does not publish it or sign with it. This option is
|
||||
incompatible with \fB\-P\fP and \fB\-A\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-g generator\fP
|
||||
.B \-g generator
|
||||
This option indicates the generator to use if generating a Diffie\-Hellman key. Allowed
|
||||
values are 2 and 5. If no generator is specified, a known prime from
|
||||
\fI\%RFC 2539\fP is used if possible; otherwise the default is 2.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-keygen\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to be written.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k policy\fP
|
||||
.B \-k policy
|
||||
This option creates keys for a specific \fBdnssec\-policy\fP\&. If a policy uses multiple keys,
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-keygen\fP generates multiple keys. This also
|
||||
creates a ".state" file to keep track of the key state.
|
||||
|
|
@ -135,8 +159,10 @@ creates a ".state" file to keep track of the key state.
|
|||
This option creates keys according to the \fBdnssec\-policy\fP configuration, hence
|
||||
it cannot be used at the same time as many of the other options that
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-keygen\fP provides.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-L ttl
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
||||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
|
|
@ -144,25 +170,33 @@ place, in which case the existing TTL takes precedence. If this
|
|||
value is not set and there is no existing DNSKEY RRset, the TTL
|
||||
defaults to the SOA TTL. Setting the default TTL to \fB0\fP or \fBnone\fP
|
||||
is the same as leaving it unset.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l file\fP
|
||||
.B \-l file
|
||||
This option provides a configuration file that contains a \fBdnssec\-policy\fP statement
|
||||
(matching the policy set with \fB\-k\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-n nametype\fP
|
||||
.B \-n nametype
|
||||
This option specifies the owner type of the key. The value of \fBnametype\fP must
|
||||
either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY
|
||||
(for a key associated with a host (KEY)), USER (for a key associated
|
||||
with a user (KEY)), or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are
|
||||
case\-insensitive. The default is ZONE for DNSKEY generation.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p protocol\fP
|
||||
.B \-p protocol
|
||||
This option sets the protocol value for the generated key, for use with
|
||||
\fB\-T KEY\fP\&. The protocol is a number between 0 and 255. The default
|
||||
is 3 (DNSSEC). Other possible values for this argument are listed in
|
||||
\fI\%RFC 2535\fP and its successors.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which suppresses unnecessary output, including progress
|
||||
indication. Without this option, when \fBdnssec\-keygen\fP is run
|
||||
interactively to generate an RSA or DSA key pair, it prints a
|
||||
|
|
@ -171,35 +205,47 @@ generation. A \fB\&.\fP indicates that a random number has been found which
|
|||
passed an initial sieve test; \fB+\fP means a number has passed a single
|
||||
round of the Miller\-Rabin primality test; and a space ( ) means that the
|
||||
number has passed all the tests and is a satisfactory key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S key\fP
|
||||
.B \-S key
|
||||
This option creates a new key which is an explicit successor to an existing key.
|
||||
The name, algorithm, size, and type of the key are set to match
|
||||
the existing key. The activation date of the new key is set to
|
||||
the inactivation date of the existing one. The publication date is
|
||||
set to the activation date minus the prepublication interval,
|
||||
which defaults to 30 days.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s strength\fP
|
||||
.B \-s strength
|
||||
This option specifies the strength value of the key. The strength is a number
|
||||
between 0 and 15, and currently has no defined purpose in DNSSEC.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T rrtype\fP
|
||||
.B \-T rrtype
|
||||
This option specifies the resource record type to use for the key. \fBrrtype\fP
|
||||
must be either DNSKEY or KEY. The default is DNSKEY when using a
|
||||
DNSSEC algorithm, but it can be overridden to KEY for use with
|
||||
SIG(0).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t type\fP
|
||||
.B \-t type
|
||||
This option indicates the type of the key for use with \fB\-T KEY\fP\&. \fBtype\fP
|
||||
must be one of AUTHCONF, NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default
|
||||
is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers to the ability to authenticate data, and
|
||||
CONF to the ability to encrypt data.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH TIMING OPTIONS
|
||||
|
|
@ -214,43 +260,57 @@ respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
|||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use \fBnone\fP or \fBnever\fP\&.
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it. If not set, and if the \fB\-G\fP option has not been used, the
|
||||
default is the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-A date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be activated. After that date,
|
||||
the key is included in the zone and used to sign it. If not set,
|
||||
and if the \fB\-G\fP option has not been used, the default is the current date. If set,
|
||||
and \fB\-P\fP is not set, the publication date is set to the
|
||||
activation date minus the prepublication interval.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-R date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-R date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be revoked. After that date, the
|
||||
key is flagged as revoked. It is included in the zone and
|
||||
is used to sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-I date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-I date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be retired. After that date, the
|
||||
key is still included in the zone, but it is not used to
|
||||
sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i interval\fP
|
||||
.B \-i interval
|
||||
This option sets the prepublication interval for a key. If set, then the
|
||||
publication and activation dates must be separated by at least this
|
||||
much time. If the activation date is specified but the publication
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -41,34 +41,48 @@ containing the now\-revoked key.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option emits a usage message and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r\fP
|
||||
.B \-r
|
||||
This option indicates to remove the original keyset files after writing the new keyset files.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually \fBpkcs11\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f\fP
|
||||
.B \-f
|
||||
This option indicates a forced overwrite and causes \fBdnssec\-revoke\fP to write the new key pair,
|
||||
even if a file already exists matching the algorithm and key ID of
|
||||
the revoked key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-R\fP
|
||||
.B \-R
|
||||
This option prints the key tag of the key with the REVOKE bit set, but does not
|
||||
revoke the key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ purposes.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f\fP
|
||||
.B \-f
|
||||
This option forces an update of an old\-format key with no metadata fields. Without
|
||||
this option, \fBdnssec\-settime\fP fails when attempting to update a
|
||||
legacy key. With this option, the key is recreated in the new
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,11 +77,15 @@ format, but with the original key data retained. The key\(aqs creation
|
|||
date is set to the present time. If no other values are
|
||||
specified, then the key\(aqs publication and activation dates are also
|
||||
set to the present time.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-L ttl
|
||||
This option sets the default TTL to use for this key when it is converted into a
|
||||
DNSKEY RR. This is the TTL used when the key is imported into a zone,
|
||||
unless there was already a DNSKEY RRset in
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,17 +93,25 @@ place, in which case the existing TTL takes precedence. If this
|
|||
value is not set and there is no existing DNSKEY RRset, the TTL
|
||||
defaults to the SOA TTL. Setting the default TTL to \fB0\fP or \fBnone\fP
|
||||
removes it from the key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option emits a usage message and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
|
|
@ -118,55 +130,75 @@ respectively. Without a suffix, the offset is computed in seconds. To
|
|||
explicitly prevent a date from being set, use \fBnone\fP or \fBnever\fP\&.
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which a key is to be published to the zone. After
|
||||
that date, the key is included in the zone but is not used
|
||||
to sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P ds date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P ds date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which DS records that match this key have been
|
||||
seen in the parent zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-P sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this key
|
||||
are to be published to the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-A date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be activated. After that date,
|
||||
the key is included in the zone and used to sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-R date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-R date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be revoked. After that date, the
|
||||
key is flagged as revoked. It is included in the zone and
|
||||
is used to sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-I date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-I date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be retired. After that date, the
|
||||
key is still included in the zone, but it is not used to
|
||||
sign it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the key is to be deleted. After that date, the
|
||||
key is no longer included in the zone. (However, it may remain in the key
|
||||
repository.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D ds date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D ds date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the DS records that match this key have
|
||||
been seen removed from the parent zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D sync date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-D sync date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the date on which the CDS and CDNSKEY records that match this
|
||||
key are to be deleted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S predecessor key\fP
|
||||
.B \-S predecessor key
|
||||
This option selects a key for which the key being modified is an explicit
|
||||
successor. The name, algorithm, size, and type of the predecessor key
|
||||
must exactly match those of the key being modified. The activation
|
||||
date of the successor key is set to the inactivation date of the
|
||||
predecessor. The publication date is set to the activation date
|
||||
minus the prepublication interval, which defaults to 30 days.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i interval\fP
|
||||
.B \-i interval
|
||||
This option sets the prepublication interval for a key. If set, then the
|
||||
publication and activation dates must be separated by at least this
|
||||
much time. If the activation date is specified but the publication
|
||||
|
|
@ -193,22 +225,32 @@ purpose, but should never be used in production.
|
|||
Known key states are HIDDEN, RUMOURED, OMNIPRESENT, and UNRETENTIVE.
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s\fP
|
||||
.B \-s
|
||||
This option indicates that when setting key timing data, the state file should also be updated.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-g state\fP
|
||||
.B \-g state
|
||||
This option sets the goal state for this key. Must be HIDDEN or OMNIPRESENT.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d state date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-d state date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the DS state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k state date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-k state date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the DNSKEY state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r state date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-r state date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the RRSIG (KSK) state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-z state date/offset\fP
|
||||
.B \-z state date/offset
|
||||
This option sets the RRSIG (ZSK) state for this key as of the specified date, offset from the current date.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH PRINTING OPTIONS
|
||||
|
|
@ -217,10 +259,12 @@ This option sets the RRSIG (ZSK) state for this key as of the specified date, of
|
|||
associated with a key.
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u\fP
|
||||
.B \-u
|
||||
This option indicates that times should be printed in Unix epoch format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p C/P/Pds/Psync/A/R/I/D/Dds/Dsync/all\fP
|
||||
.B \-p C/P/Pds/Psync/A/R/I/D/Dds/Dsync/all
|
||||
This option prints a specific metadata value or set of metadata values.
|
||||
The \fB\-p\fP option may be followed by one or more of the following letters or
|
||||
strings to indicate which value or values to print: \fBC\fP for the
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -43,49 +43,67 @@ file for each child zone.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a\fP
|
||||
.B \-a
|
||||
This option verifies all generated signatures.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class of the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP
|
||||
.B \-C
|
||||
This option sets compatibility mode, in which a \fBkeyset\-zonename\fP file is generated in addition
|
||||
to \fBdsset\-zonename\fP when signing a zone, for use by older versions
|
||||
of \fBdnssec\-signzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-d directory
|
||||
This option indicates the directory where BIND 9 should look for \fBdsset\-\fP or \fBkeyset\-\fP files.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D\fP
|
||||
.B \-D
|
||||
This option indicates that only those record types automatically managed by
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-signzone\fP, i.e., RRSIG, NSEC, NSEC3 and NSEC3PARAM records, should be included in the output.
|
||||
If smart signing (\fB\-S\fP) is used, DNSKEY records are also included.
|
||||
The resulting file can be included in the original zone file with
|
||||
\fB$INCLUDE\fP\&. This option cannot be combined with \fB\-O raw\fP
|
||||
or serial\-number updating.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine
|
||||
This option specifies the hardware to use for cryptographic
|
||||
operations, such as a secure key store used for signing, when applicable.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually \fBpkcs11\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-g\fP
|
||||
.B \-g
|
||||
This option indicates that DS records for child zones should be generated from a \fBdsset\-\fP or \fBkeyset\-\fP
|
||||
file. Existing DS records are removed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-K directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-K directory
|
||||
This option specifies the directory to search for DNSSEC keys. If not
|
||||
specified, it defaults to the current directory.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k key\fP
|
||||
.B \-k key
|
||||
This option tells BIND 9 to treat the specified key as a key\-signing key, ignoring any key flags. This
|
||||
option may be specified multiple times.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-M maxttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-M maxttl
|
||||
This option sets the maximum TTL for the signed zone. Any TTL higher than \fBmaxttl\fP
|
||||
in the input zone is reduced to \fBmaxttl\fP in the output. This
|
||||
provides certainty as to the largest possible TTL in the signed zone,
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,8 +113,10 @@ expire from resolver caches. Zones that are signed with this
|
|||
option should be configured to use a matching \fBmax\-zone\-ttl\fP in
|
||||
\fBnamed.conf\fP\&. (Note: This option is incompatible with \fB\-D\fP,
|
||||
because it modifies non\-DNSSEC data in the output zone.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s start\-time\fP
|
||||
.B \-s start\-time
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time when the generated RRSIG records become
|
||||
valid. This can be either an absolute or relative time. An absolute
|
||||
start time is indicated by a number in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation;
|
||||
|
|
@ -104,8 +124,10 @@ start time is indicated by a number in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation;
|
|||
start time is indicated by \fB+N\fP, which is N seconds from the current
|
||||
time. If no \fBstart\-time\fP is specified, the current time minus 1
|
||||
hour (to allow for clock skew) is used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-e end\-time\fP
|
||||
.B \-e end\-time
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time when the generated RRSIG records expire. As
|
||||
with \fBstart\-time\fP, an absolute time is indicated in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
|
||||
notation. A time relative to the start time is indicated with \fB+N\fP,
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,8 +135,10 @@ which is N seconds from the start time. A time relative to the
|
|||
current time is indicated with \fBnow+N\fP\&. If no \fBend\-time\fP is
|
||||
specified, 30 days from the start time is the default.
|
||||
\fBend\-time\fP must be later than \fBstart\-time\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-X extended end\-time\fP
|
||||
.B \-X extended end\-time
|
||||
This option specifies the date and time when the generated RRSIG records for the
|
||||
DNSKEY RRset expire. This is to be used in cases when the DNSKEY
|
||||
signatures need to persist longer than signatures on other records;
|
||||
|
|
@ -128,21 +152,29 @@ relative to the current time is indicated with \fBnow+N\fP\&. If no
|
|||
\fBextended end\-time\fP is specified, the value of \fBend\-time\fP is used
|
||||
as the default. (\fBend\-time\fP, in turn, defaults to 30 days from the
|
||||
start time.) \fBextended end\-time\fP must be later than \fBstart\-time\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f output\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-f output\-file
|
||||
This option indicates the name of the output file containing the signed zone. The default
|
||||
is to append \fB\&.signed\fP to the input filename. If \fBoutput\-file\fP is
|
||||
set to \fB\-\fP, then the signed zone is written to the standard
|
||||
output, with a default output format of \fBfull\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-signzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i interval\fP
|
||||
.B \-i interval
|
||||
This option indicates that, when a previously signed zone is passed as input, records may be
|
||||
re\-signed. The \fBinterval\fP option specifies the cycle interval as an
|
||||
offset from the current time, in seconds. If a RRSIG record expires
|
||||
|
|
@ -155,15 +187,19 @@ the signature end and start times. So if neither \fBend\-time\fP nor
|
|||
signatures that are valid for 30 days, with a cycle interval of 7.5
|
||||
days. Therefore, if any existing RRSIG records are due to expire in
|
||||
less than 7.5 days, they are replaced.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-I input\-format\fP
|
||||
.B \-I input\-format
|
||||
This option sets the format of the input zone file. Possible formats are
|
||||
\fBtext\fP (the default), and \fBraw\fP\&. This option is primarily
|
||||
intended to be used for dynamic signed zones, so that the dumped zone
|
||||
file in a non\-text format containing updates can be signed directly.
|
||||
This option is not useful for non\-dynamic zones.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-j jitter\fP
|
||||
.B \-j jitter
|
||||
When signing a zone with a fixed signature lifetime, all RRSIG
|
||||
records issued at the time of signing expire simultaneously. If the
|
||||
zone is incrementally signed, i.e., a previously signed zone is passed
|
||||
|
|
@ -177,17 +213,23 @@ servers by spreading out cache expiration, i.e., if large numbers of
|
|||
RRSIGs do not expire at the same time from all caches, there is
|
||||
less congestion than if all validators need to refetch at around the
|
||||
same time.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L serial\fP
|
||||
.B \-L serial
|
||||
When writing a signed zone to "raw" format, this option sets the "source
|
||||
serial" value in the header to the specified \fBserial\fP number. (This is
|
||||
expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-n ncpus\fP
|
||||
.B \-n ncpus
|
||||
This option specifies the number of threads to use. By default, one thread is
|
||||
started for each detected CPU.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-N soa\-serial\-format\fP
|
||||
.B \-N soa\-serial\-format
|
||||
This option sets the SOA serial number format of the signed zone. Possible formats are
|
||||
\fBkeep\fP (the default), \fBincrement\fP, \fBunixtime\fP, and
|
||||
\fBdate\fP\&.
|
||||
|
|
@ -211,12 +253,16 @@ YYYYMMDDNN format, unless the serial number is already greater
|
|||
than or equal to that value, in which case it is simply
|
||||
incremented by one.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-o origin\fP
|
||||
.B \-o origin
|
||||
This option sets the zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file is
|
||||
assumed to be the origin.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-O output\-format\fP
|
||||
.B \-O output\-format
|
||||
This option sets the format of the output file containing the signed
|
||||
zone. Possible formats are \fBtext\fP (the default), which is the standard
|
||||
textual representation of the zone; \fBfull\fP, which is text output in a
|
||||
|
|
@ -225,16 +271,20 @@ format suitable for processing by external scripts; and \fBraw\fP and
|
|||
\fBnamed\fP\&. \fBraw=N\fP specifies the format version of the raw zone file:
|
||||
if N is 0, the raw file can be read by any version of \fBnamed\fP; if N is
|
||||
1, the file can be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P\fP
|
||||
.B \-P
|
||||
This option disables post\-sign verification tests.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The post\-sign verification tests ensure that for each algorithm in
|
||||
use there is at least one non\-revoked self\-signed KSK key, that all
|
||||
revoked KSK keys are self\-signed, and that all records in the zone
|
||||
are signed by the algorithm. This option skips these tests.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-Q\fP
|
||||
.B \-Q
|
||||
This option removes signatures from keys that are no longer active.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Normally, when a previously signed zone is passed as input to the
|
||||
|
|
@ -245,15 +295,19 @@ with cached copies of the old DNSKEY RRset. The \fB\-Q\fP option forces
|
|||
\fBdnssec\-signzone\fP to remove signatures from keys that are no longer
|
||||
active. This enables ZSK rollover using the procedure described in
|
||||
\fI\%RFC 4641#4.2.1.1\fP ("Pre\-Publish Key Rollover").
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option enables quiet mode, which suppresses unnecessary output. Without this option, when
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-signzone\fP is run it prints three pieces of information to standard output: the number of
|
||||
keys in use; the algorithms used to verify the zone was signed correctly and
|
||||
other status information; and the filename containing the signed
|
||||
zone. With the option that output is suppressed, leaving only the filename.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-R\fP
|
||||
.B \-R
|
||||
This option removes signatures from keys that are no longer published.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
This option is similar to \fB\-Q\fP, except it forces
|
||||
|
|
@ -261,8 +315,10 @@ This option is similar to \fB\-Q\fP, except it forces
|
|||
published. This enables ZSK rollover using the procedure described in
|
||||
\fI\%RFC 4641#4.2.1.2\fP ("Double Signature Zone Signing Key
|
||||
Rollover").
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S\fP
|
||||
.B \-S
|
||||
This option enables smart signing, which instructs \fBdnssec\-signzone\fP to search the key
|
||||
repository for keys that match the zone being signed, and to include
|
||||
them in the zone if appropriate.
|
||||
|
|
@ -297,8 +353,10 @@ If the key\(aqs sync deletion date is set and is in the past,
|
|||
synchronization records (type CDS and/or CDNSKEY) are removed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-T ttl
|
||||
This option specifies a TTL to be used for new DNSKEY records imported into the
|
||||
zone from the key repository. If not specified, the default is the
|
||||
TTL value from the zone\(aqs SOA record. This option is ignored when
|
||||
|
|
@ -309,52 +367,72 @@ records\(aq TTL values are set to match them, or if any of the
|
|||
imported DNSKEY records had a default TTL value. In the event of a
|
||||
conflict between TTL values in imported keys, the shortest one is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t\fP
|
||||
.B \-t
|
||||
This option prints statistics at completion.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u\fP
|
||||
.B \-u
|
||||
This option updates the NSEC/NSEC3 chain when re\-signing a previously signed zone.
|
||||
With this option, a zone signed with NSEC can be switched to NSEC3,
|
||||
or a zone signed with NSEC3 can be switched to NSEC or to NSEC3 with
|
||||
different parameters. Without this option, \fBdnssec\-signzone\fP
|
||||
retains the existing chain when re\-signing.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x\fP
|
||||
.B \-x
|
||||
This option indicates that BIND 9 should only sign the DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS RRsets with key\-signing keys,
|
||||
and should omit signatures from zone\-signing keys. (This is similar to the
|
||||
\fBdnssec\-dnskey\-kskonly yes;\fP zone option in \fBnamed\fP\&.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-z\fP
|
||||
.B \-z
|
||||
This option indicates that BIND 9 should ignore the KSK flag on keys when determining what to sign. This causes
|
||||
KSK\-flagged keys to sign all records, not just the DNSKEY RRset.
|
||||
(This is similar to the \fBupdate\-check\-ksk no;\fP zone option in
|
||||
\fBnamed\fP\&.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-3 salt\fP
|
||||
.B \-3 salt
|
||||
This option generates an NSEC3 chain with the given hex\-encoded salt. A dash
|
||||
(\-) can be used to indicate that no salt is to be used when
|
||||
generating the NSEC3 chain.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-H iterations\fP
|
||||
.B \-H iterations
|
||||
This option indicates that, when generating an NSEC3 chain, BIND 9 should use this many iterations. The default
|
||||
is 10.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A\fP
|
||||
.B \-A
|
||||
This option indicates that, when generating an NSEC3 chain, BIND 9 should set the OPTOUT flag on all NSEC3
|
||||
records and should not generate NSEC3 records for insecure delegations.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Using this option twice (i.e., \fB\-AA\fP) turns the OPTOUT flag off for
|
||||
all records. This is useful when using the \fB\-u\fP option to modify an
|
||||
NSEC3 chain which previously had OPTOUT set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBzonefile\fP
|
||||
.B zonefile
|
||||
This option sets the file containing the zone to be signed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBkey\fP
|
||||
.B key
|
||||
This option specifies which keys should be used to sign the zone. If no keys are
|
||||
specified, the zone is examined for DNSKEY records at the
|
||||
zone apex. If these records are found and there are matching private keys in
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -41,48 +41,64 @@ NSEC/NSEC3 chains are complete.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the DNS class of the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine
|
||||
This option specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually \fBpkcs11\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-I input\-format\fP
|
||||
.B \-I input\-format
|
||||
This option sets the format of the input zone file. Possible formats are \fBtext\fP
|
||||
(the default) and \fBraw\fP\&. This option is primarily intended to be used
|
||||
for dynamic signed zones, so that the dumped zone file in a non\-text
|
||||
format containing updates can be verified independently.
|
||||
This option is not useful for non\-dynamic zones.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-o origin\fP
|
||||
.B \-o origin
|
||||
This option indicates the zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file is
|
||||
assumed to be the origin.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v level\fP
|
||||
.B \-v level
|
||||
This option sets the debugging level.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints version information.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which suppresses output. Without this option, when \fBdnssec\-verify\fP
|
||||
is run it prints to standard output the number of keys in use, the
|
||||
algorithms used to verify the zone was signed correctly, and other status
|
||||
information. With this option, all non\-error output is suppressed, and only the exit
|
||||
code indicates success.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x\fP
|
||||
.B \-x
|
||||
This option verifies only that the DNSKEY RRset is signed with key\-signing keys.
|
||||
Without this flag, it is assumed that the DNSKEY RRset is signed
|
||||
by all active keys. When this flag is set, it is not an error if
|
||||
the DNSKEY RRset is not signed by zone\-signing keys. This corresponds
|
||||
to the \fB\-x\fP option in \fBdnssec\-signzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-z\fP
|
||||
.B \-z
|
||||
This option indicates that the KSK flag on the keys should be ignored when determining whether the zone is
|
||||
correctly signed. Without this flag, it is assumed that there is
|
||||
a non\-revoked, self\-signed DNSKEY with the KSK flag set for each
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,6 +111,8 @@ the KSK flag state, and that other RRsets be signed by a
|
|||
non\-revoked key for the same algorithm that includes the self\-signed
|
||||
key; the same key may be used for both purposes. This corresponds to
|
||||
the \fB\-z\fP option in \fBdnssec\-signzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBzonefile\fP
|
||||
This option indicates the file containing the zone to be signed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -42,18 +42,24 @@ longer and more detailed YAML format is used.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m\fP
|
||||
.B \-m
|
||||
This option indicates trace memory allocations, and is used for debugging memory leaks.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p\fP
|
||||
.B \-p
|
||||
This option prints the text form of the DNS
|
||||
message that was encapsulated in the \fBdnstap\fP frame, after printing the \fBdnstap\fP data.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x\fP
|
||||
.B \-x
|
||||
This option prints a hex dump of the wire form
|
||||
of the DNS message that was encapsulated in the \fBdnstap\fP frame, after printing the \fBdnstap\fP data.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-y\fP
|
||||
.B \-y
|
||||
This option prints \fBdnstap\fP data in a detailed YAML format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -49,69 +49,95 @@ server or servers listed in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP\&.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option specifies that only IPv4 should be used for query transport. See also the \fB\-6\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option specifies that only IPv6 should be used for query transport. See also the \fB\-4\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a\fP
|
||||
.B \-a
|
||||
The \fB\-a\fP ("all") option is normally equivalent to \fB\-v \-t ANY\fP\&. It
|
||||
also affects the behavior of the \fB\-l\fP list zone option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A\fP
|
||||
.B \-A
|
||||
The \fB\-A\fP ("almost all") option is equivalent to \fB\-a\fP, except that RRSIG,
|
||||
NSEC, and NSEC3 records are omitted from the output.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the query class, which can be used to lookup HS (Hesiod) or CH (Chaosnet)
|
||||
class resource records. The default class is IN (Internet).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP
|
||||
.B \-C
|
||||
This option indicates that \fBnamed\fP should check consistency, meaning that \fBhost\fP queries the SOA records for zone
|
||||
\fBname\fP from all the listed authoritative name servers for that
|
||||
zone. The list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are
|
||||
found for the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d\fP
|
||||
.B \-d
|
||||
This option prints debugging traces, and is equivalent to the \fB\-v\fP verbose option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l\fP
|
||||
.B \-l
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to list the zone, meaning the \fBhost\fP command performs a zone transfer of zone
|
||||
\fBname\fP and prints out the NS, PTR, and address records (A/AAAA).
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Together, the \fB\-l \-a\fP options print all records in the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-N ndots\fP
|
||||
.B \-N ndots
|
||||
This option specifies the number of dots (\fBndots\fP) that have to be in \fBname\fP for it to be
|
||||
considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the
|
||||
\fBndots\fP statement in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP, or 1 if no \fBndots\fP statement
|
||||
is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names,
|
||||
and are searched for in the domains listed in the \fBsearch\fP or
|
||||
\fBdomain\fP directive in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port
|
||||
This option specifies the port to query on the server. The default is 53.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r\fP
|
||||
.B \-r
|
||||
This option specifies a non\-recursive query; setting this option clears the RD (recursion
|
||||
desired) bit in the query. This means that the name server
|
||||
receiving the query does not attempt to resolve \fBname\fP\&. The \fB\-r\fP
|
||||
option enables \fBhost\fP to mimic the behavior of a name server by
|
||||
making non\-recursive queries, and expecting to receive answers to
|
||||
those queries that can be referrals to other name servers.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-R number\fP
|
||||
.B \-R number
|
||||
This option specifies the number of retries for UDP queries. If \fBnumber\fP is negative or zero,
|
||||
the number of retries is silently set to 1. The default value is 1, or
|
||||
the value of the \fBattempts\fP option in \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP, if set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s\fP
|
||||
.B \-s
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP \fInot\fP to send the query to the next nameserver if any server responds
|
||||
with a SERVFAIL response, which is the reverse of normal stub
|
||||
resolver behavior.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t type\fP
|
||||
.B \-t type
|
||||
This option specifies the query type. The \fBtype\fP argument can be any recognized query type:
|
||||
CNAME, NS, SOA, TXT, DNSKEY, AXFR, etc.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,32 +150,44 @@ colon\-delimited IPv6 address, \fBhost\fP queries for PTR records.
|
|||
If a query type of IXFR is chosen, the starting serial number can be
|
||||
specified by appending an equals sign (=), followed by the starting serial
|
||||
number, e.g., \fB\-t IXFR=12345678\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T\fP; \fB\-U\fP
|
||||
.B \-T\(ga\(ga; \(ga\(ga\-U
|
||||
This option specifies TCP or UDP. By default, \fBhost\fP uses UDP when making queries; the
|
||||
\fB\-T\fP option makes it use a TCP connection when querying the name
|
||||
server. TCP is automatically selected for queries that require
|
||||
it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests. Type \fBANY\fP queries default
|
||||
to TCP, but can be forced to use UDP initially via \fB\-U\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m flag\fP
|
||||
.B \-m flag
|
||||
This option sets memory usage debugging: the flag can be \fBrecord\fP, \fBusage\fP, or
|
||||
\fBtrace\fP\&. The \fB\-m\fP option can be specified more than once to set
|
||||
multiple flags.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option sets verbose output, and is equivalent to the \fB\-d\fP debug option. Verbose output
|
||||
can also be enabled by setting the \fBdebug\fP option in
|
||||
\fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints the version number and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-w\fP
|
||||
.B \-w
|
||||
This option sets "wait forever": the query timeout is set to the maximum possible. See
|
||||
also the \fB\-W\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-W wait\fP
|
||||
.B \-W wait
|
||||
This options sets the length of the wait timeout, indicating that \fBnamed\fP should wait for up to \fBwait\fP seconds for a reply. If \fBwait\fP is
|
||||
less than 1, the wait interval is set to 1 second.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
200
doc/man/mdig.1in
200
doc/man/mdig.1in
|
|
@ -70,39 +70,51 @@ assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
|
|||
.SH ANYWHERE OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f\fP
|
||||
.B \-f
|
||||
This option makes \fBmdig\fP operate in batch mode by reading a list
|
||||
of lookup requests to process from the file \fBfilename\fP\&. The file
|
||||
contains a number of queries, one per line. Each entry in the file
|
||||
should be organized in the same way they would be presented as queries
|
||||
to \fBmdig\fP using the command\-line interface.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option causes \fBmdig\fP to print detailed help information, with the full list
|
||||
of options, and exit.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option causes \fBmdig\fP to print the version number and exit.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH GLOBAL OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option forces \fBmdig\fP to only use IPv4 query transport.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option forces \fBmdig\fP to only use IPv6 query transport.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-b address\fP
|
||||
.B \-b address
|
||||
This option sets the source IP address of the query to
|
||||
\fBaddress\fP\&. This must be a valid address on one of the host\(aqs network
|
||||
interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::". An optional port may be specified by
|
||||
appending "#<port>"
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m\fP
|
||||
.B \-m
|
||||
This option enables memory usage debugging.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port#\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port#
|
||||
This option is used when a non\-standard port number is to be
|
||||
queried. \fBport#\fP is the port number that \fBmdig\fP sends its
|
||||
queries to, instead of the standard DNS port number 53. This option is
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,90 +125,128 @@ queries on a non\-standard port number.
|
|||
The global query options are:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]additional\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]additional
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the additional section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]all\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]all
|
||||
This option sets or clears all display flags.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]answer\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]answer
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
|
||||
is to display it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]authority\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]authority
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the authority section of a reply. The
|
||||
default is to display it.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]besteffort\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]besteffort
|
||||
This option attempts to display [or does not display] the contents of messages which are malformed. The
|
||||
default is to not display malformed answers.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+burst\fP
|
||||
.B +burst
|
||||
This option delays queries until the start of the next second.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cl\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cl
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]comments\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]comments
|
||||
This option toggles the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
|
||||
print comments.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]continue\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]continue
|
||||
This option toggles continuation on errors (e.g. timeouts).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]crypto\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]crypto
|
||||
This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
|
||||
contents of these fields are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
|
||||
validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
|
||||
common failures. The default is to display the fields. When omitted,
|
||||
they are replaced by the string "[omitted]"; in the DNSKEY case, the
|
||||
key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g., \fB[ key id = value ]\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+dscp[=value]\fP
|
||||
.B +dscp[=value]
|
||||
This option sets the DSCP code point to be used when sending the query. Valid DSCP
|
||||
code points are in the range [0...63]. By default no code point is
|
||||
explicitly set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]multiline\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]multiline
|
||||
This option toggles printing of records, like the SOA records, in a verbose multi\-line format
|
||||
with human\-readable comments. The default is to print each record on
|
||||
a single line, to facilitate machine parsing of the \fBmdig\fP output.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]question\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]question
|
||||
This option prints [or does not print] the question section of a query when an answer
|
||||
is returned. The default is to print the question section as a
|
||||
comment.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]rrcomments\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]rrcomments
|
||||
This option toggles the display of per\-record comments in the output (for example,
|
||||
human\-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
|
||||
not to print record comments unless multiline mode is active.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]short\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]short
|
||||
This option provides [or does not provide] a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a
|
||||
verbose form.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+split=W\fP
|
||||
.B +split=W
|
||||
This option splits long hex\- or base64\-formatted fields in resource records into
|
||||
chunks of \fBW\fP characters (where \fBW\fP is rounded up to the nearest
|
||||
multiple of 4). \fB+nosplit\fP or \fB+split=0\fP causes fields not to be
|
||||
split. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
|
||||
multiline mode is active.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]tcp\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]tcp
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default behavior
|
||||
is to use UDP.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ttlid\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ttlid
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL when printing the record.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ttlunits\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ttlunits
|
||||
This option displays [or does not display] the TTL in friendly human\-readable time
|
||||
units of "s", "m", "h", "d", and "w", representing seconds, minutes,
|
||||
hours, days, and weeks. This implies +ttlid.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]vc\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]vc
|
||||
This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
|
||||
syntax to \fB+[no]tcp\fP is provided for backwards compatibility. The
|
||||
\fBvc\fP stands for "virtual circuit".
|
||||
|
|
@ -204,18 +254,22 @@ syntax to \fB+[no]tcp\fP is provided for backwards compatibility. The
|
|||
.SH LOCAL OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option sets the query class to \fBclass\fP\&. It can be any valid
|
||||
query class which is supported in BIND 9. The default query class is
|
||||
"IN".
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t type\fP
|
||||
.B \-t type
|
||||
This option sets the query type to \fBtype\fP\&. It can be any valid
|
||||
query type which is supported in BIND 9. The default query type is "A",
|
||||
unless the \fB\-x\fP option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup with
|
||||
the "PTR" query type.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x addr\fP
|
||||
.B \-x addr
|
||||
Reverse lookups \- mapping addresses to names \- are simplified by
|
||||
this option. \fBaddr\fP is an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal
|
||||
notation, or a colon\-delimited IPv6 address. \fBmdig\fP automatically
|
||||
|
|
@ -228,13 +282,17 @@ domain.
|
|||
The local query options are:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]aaflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]aaflag
|
||||
This is a synonym for \fB+[no]aaonly\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]aaonly\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]aaonly
|
||||
This sets the \fBaa\fP flag in the query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]adflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]adflag
|
||||
This sets [or does not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to return whether all of the answer and authority
|
||||
sections have all been validated as secure, according to the security
|
||||
|
|
@ -242,91 +300,129 @@ policy of the server. AD=1 indicates that all records have been
|
|||
validated as secure and the answer is not from a OPT\-OUT range. AD=0
|
||||
indicates that some part of the answer was insecure or not validated.
|
||||
This bit is set by default.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+bufsize=B\fP
|
||||
.B +bufsize=B
|
||||
This sets the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to \fBB\fP
|
||||
bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are 65535 and 0
|
||||
respectively. Values outside this range are rounded up or down
|
||||
appropriately. Values other than zero cause a EDNS query to be
|
||||
sent.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cdflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cdflag
|
||||
This sets [or does not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
|
||||
requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]cookie=####\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]cookie=####
|
||||
This sends [or does not send] a COOKIE EDNS option, with an optional value. Replaying a COOKIE
|
||||
from a previous response allows the server to identify a previous
|
||||
client. The default is \fB+nocookie\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]dnssec\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]dnssec
|
||||
This requests that DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK (DO) bit in
|
||||
the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]edns[=#]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]edns[=#]
|
||||
This specifies [or does not specify] the EDNS version to query with. Valid values are 0 to 255.
|
||||
Setting the EDNS version causes an EDNS query to be sent.
|
||||
\fB+noedns\fP clears the remembered EDNS version. EDNS is set to 0 by
|
||||
default.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ednsflags[=#]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ednsflags[=#]
|
||||
This sets the must\-be\-zero EDNS flag bits (Z bits) to the specified value.
|
||||
Decimal, hex, and octal encodings are accepted. Setting a named flag
|
||||
(e.g. DO) is silently ignored. By default, no Z bits are set.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]
|
||||
This specifies [or does not specify] an EDNS option with code point \fBcode\fP and an optional payload
|
||||
of \fBvalue\fP as a hexadecimal string. \fB+noednsopt\fP clears the EDNS
|
||||
options to be sent.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]expire\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]expire
|
||||
This toggles sending of an EDNS Expire option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]nsid\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]nsid
|
||||
This toggles inclusion of an EDNS name server ID request when sending a query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]recurse\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]recurse
|
||||
This toggles the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
|
||||
This bit is set by default, which means \fBmdig\fP normally sends
|
||||
recursive queries.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+retry=T\fP
|
||||
.B +retry=T
|
||||
This sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to \fBT\fP
|
||||
instead of the default, 2. Unlike \fB+tries\fP, this does not include
|
||||
the initial query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]subnet=addr[/prefix\-length]\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]subnet=addr[/prefix\-length]
|
||||
This sends [or does not send] an EDNS Client Subnet option with the specified IP
|
||||
address or network prefix.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBmdig +subnet=0.0.0.0/0\fP, or simply \fBmdig +subnet=0\fP
|
||||
This sends an EDNS client\-subnet option with an empty address and a source
|
||||
prefix\-length of zero, which signals a resolver that the client\(aqs
|
||||
address information must \fInot\fP be used when resolving this query.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+timeout=T\fP
|
||||
.B +timeout=T
|
||||
This sets the timeout for a query to \fBT\fP seconds. The default timeout is
|
||||
5 seconds for UDP transport and 10 for TCP. An attempt to set \fBT\fP
|
||||
to less than 1 results in a query timeout of 1 second being
|
||||
applied.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+tries=T\fP
|
||||
.B +tries=T
|
||||
This sets the number of times to try UDP queries to server to \fBT\fP
|
||||
instead of the default, 3. If \fBT\fP is less than or equal to zero,
|
||||
the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+udptimeout=T\fP
|
||||
.B +udptimeout=T
|
||||
This sets the timeout between UDP query retries to \fBT\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]unknownformat\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]unknownformat
|
||||
This prints [or does not print] all RDATA in unknown RR\-type presentation format (see \fI\%RFC 3597\fP).
|
||||
The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type\(aqs
|
||||
presentation format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]yaml\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]yaml
|
||||
This toggles printing of the responses in a detailed YAML format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB+[no]zflag\fP
|
||||
.B +[no]zflag
|
||||
This sets [or does not set] the last unassigned DNS header flag in a DNS query.
|
||||
This flag is off by default.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -48,48 +48,68 @@ However, \fBnamed\-checkconf\fP can be run on these files explicitly.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints the usage summary and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-j\fP
|
||||
.B \-j
|
||||
When loading a zonefile, this option instructs \fBnamed\fP to read the journal if it exists.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l\fP
|
||||
.B \-l
|
||||
This option lists all the configured zones. Each line of output contains the zone
|
||||
name, class (e.g. IN), view, and type (e.g. primary or secondary).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c\fP
|
||||
.B \-c
|
||||
This option specifies that only the "core" configuration should be checked. This suppresses the loading of
|
||||
plugin modules, and causes all parameters to \fBplugin\fP statements to
|
||||
be ignored.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i\fP
|
||||
.B \-i
|
||||
This option ignores warnings on deprecated options.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p\fP
|
||||
.B \-p
|
||||
This option prints out the \fBnamed.conf\fP and included files in canonical form if
|
||||
no errors were detected. See also the \fB\-x\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-t directory
|
||||
This option instructs \fBnamed\fP to chroot to \fBdirectory\fP, so that \fBinclude\fP directives in the
|
||||
configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
|
||||
\fBnamed\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option prints the version of the \fBnamed\-checkconf\fP program and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-x\fP
|
||||
.B \-x
|
||||
When printing the configuration files in canonical form, this option obscures
|
||||
shared secrets by replacing them with strings of question marks
|
||||
(\fB?\fP). This allows the contents of \fBnamed.conf\fP and related files
|
||||
to be shared \- for example, when submitting bug reports \-
|
||||
without compromising private data. This option cannot be used without
|
||||
\fB\-p\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-z\fP
|
||||
.B \-z
|
||||
This option performs a test load of all zones of type \fBprimary\fP found in \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBfilename\fP
|
||||
.B filename
|
||||
This indicates the name of the configuration file to be checked. If not specified,
|
||||
it defaults to \fB@sysconfdir@/named.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -42,32 +42,46 @@ configuring them into a name server.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d\fP
|
||||
.B \-d
|
||||
This option enables debugging.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints the usage summary and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which only sets an exit code to indicate
|
||||
successful or failed completion.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option prints the version of the \fBnamed\-checkzone\fP program and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-j\fP
|
||||
.B \-j
|
||||
When loading a zone file, this option tells \fBnamed\fP to read the journal if it exists. The journal
|
||||
file name is assumed to be the zone file name with the
|
||||
string \fB\&.jnl\fP appended.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-J filename\fP
|
||||
.B \-J filename
|
||||
When loading the zone file, this option tells \fBnamed\fP to read the journal from the given file, if
|
||||
it exists. This implies \fB\-j\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the class of the zone. If not specified, \fBIN\fP is assumed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-i mode
|
||||
This option performs post\-load zone integrity checks. Possible modes are
|
||||
\fBfull\fP (the default), \fBfull\-sibling\fP, \fBlocal\fP,
|
||||
\fBlocal\-sibling\fP, and \fBnone\fP\&.
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,12 +106,16 @@ checks, but are otherwise the same as \fBfull\fP and \fBlocal\fP,
|
|||
respectively.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Mode \fBnone\fP disables the checks.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f format\fP
|
||||
.B \-f format
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the zone file. Possible formats are
|
||||
\fBtext\fP (the default), and \fBraw\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-F format\fP
|
||||
.B \-F format
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the output file specified. For
|
||||
\fBnamed\-checkzone\fP, this does not have any effect unless it dumps
|
||||
the zone contents.
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,44 +126,62 @@ store the zone in a binary format for rapid loading by \fBnamed\fP\&.
|
|||
\fBraw=N\fP specifies the format version of the raw zone file: if \fBN\fP is
|
||||
0, the raw file can be read by any version of \fBnamed\fP; if N is 1, the
|
||||
file can only be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-k mode
|
||||
This option performs \fBcheck\-names\fP checks with the specified failure mode.
|
||||
Possible modes are \fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-l ttl
|
||||
This option sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file. Any record with a
|
||||
TTL higher than this value causes the zone to be rejected. This
|
||||
is similar to using the \fBmax\-zone\-ttl\fP option in \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L serial\fP
|
||||
.B \-L serial
|
||||
When compiling a zone to \fBraw\fP format, this option sets the "source
|
||||
serial" value in the header to the specified serial number. This is
|
||||
expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-m mode
|
||||
This option specifies whether MX records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are \fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and
|
||||
\fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-M mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-M mode
|
||||
This option checks whether a MX record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
\fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-n mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-n mode
|
||||
This option specifies whether NS records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are \fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-o filename\fP
|
||||
.B \-o filename
|
||||
This option writes the zone output to \fBfilename\fP\&. If \fBfilename\fP is \fB\-\fP, then
|
||||
the zone output is written to standard output.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-r mode
|
||||
This option checks for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are
|
||||
semantically equal in plain DNS. Possible modes are \fBfail\fP,
|
||||
\fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s style\fP
|
||||
.B \-s style
|
||||
This option specifies the style of the dumped zone file. Possible styles are
|
||||
\fBfull\fP (the default) and \fBrelative\fP\&. The \fBfull\fP format is most
|
||||
suitable for processing automatically by a separate script.
|
||||
|
|
@ -153,39 +189,55 @@ The relative format is more human\-readable and is thus
|
|||
suitable for editing by hand. This does not have any effect unless it dumps
|
||||
the zone contents. It also does not have any meaning if the output format
|
||||
is not text.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-S mode
|
||||
This option checks whether an SRV record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
\fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-t directory
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to chroot to \fBdirectory\fP, so that \fBinclude\fP directives in the
|
||||
configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
|
||||
\fBnamed\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-T mode
|
||||
This option checks whether Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a
|
||||
warning if an SPF\-formatted TXT record is not also present. Possible
|
||||
modes are \fBwarn\fP (the default) and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-w directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-w directory
|
||||
This option instructs \fBnamed\fP to chdir to \fBdirectory\fP, so that relative filenames in master file
|
||||
\fB$INCLUDE\fP directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
|
||||
\fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D\fP
|
||||
.B \-D
|
||||
This option dumps the zone file in canonical format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-W mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-W mode
|
||||
This option specifies whether to check for non\-terminal wildcards. Non\-terminal
|
||||
wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the
|
||||
wildcard matching algorithm (\fI\%RFC 4592\fP). Possible modes are \fBwarn\fP
|
||||
(the default) and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBzonename\fP
|
||||
.B zonename
|
||||
This indicates the domain name of the zone being checked.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBfilename\fP
|
||||
.B filename
|
||||
This is the name of the zone file.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -44,32 +44,46 @@ strict as those specified in the \fBnamed\fP configuration file.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d\fP
|
||||
.B \-d
|
||||
This option enables debugging.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints the usage summary and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, which only sets an exit code to indicate
|
||||
successful or failed completion.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option prints the version of the \fBnamed\-checkzone\fP program and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-j\fP
|
||||
.B \-j
|
||||
When loading a zone file, this option tells \fBnamed\fP to read the journal if it exists. The journal
|
||||
file name is assumed to be the zone file name with the
|
||||
string \fB\&.jnl\fP appended.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-J filename\fP
|
||||
.B \-J filename
|
||||
When loading the zone file, this option tells \fBnamed\fP to read the journal from the given file, if
|
||||
it exists. This implies \fB\-j\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c class\fP
|
||||
.B \-c class
|
||||
This option specifies the class of the zone. If not specified, \fBIN\fP is assumed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-i mode
|
||||
This option performs post\-load zone integrity checks. Possible modes are
|
||||
\fBfull\fP (the default), \fBfull\-sibling\fP, \fBlocal\fP,
|
||||
\fBlocal\-sibling\fP, and \fBnone\fP\&.
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,12 +108,16 @@ checks, but are otherwise the same as \fBfull\fP and \fBlocal\fP,
|
|||
respectively.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Mode \fBnone\fP disables the checks.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f format\fP
|
||||
.B \-f format
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the zone file. Possible formats are
|
||||
\fBtext\fP (the default), and \fBraw\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-F format\fP
|
||||
.B \-F format
|
||||
This option specifies the format of the output file specified. For
|
||||
\fBnamed\-checkzone\fP, this does not have any effect unless it dumps
|
||||
the zone contents.
|
||||
|
|
@ -110,84 +128,118 @@ store the zone in a binary format for rapid loading by \fBnamed\fP\&.
|
|||
\fBraw=N\fP specifies the format version of the raw zone file: if \fBN\fP is
|
||||
0, the raw file can be read by any version of \fBnamed\fP; if N is 1, the
|
||||
file can only be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-k mode
|
||||
This option performs \fBcheck\-names\fP checks with the specified failure mode.
|
||||
Possible modes are \fBfail\fP (the default), \fBwarn\fP, and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l ttl\fP
|
||||
.B \-l ttl
|
||||
This option sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file. Any record with a
|
||||
TTL higher than this value causes the zone to be rejected. This
|
||||
is similar to using the \fBmax\-zone\-ttl\fP option in \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L serial\fP
|
||||
.B \-L serial
|
||||
When compiling a zone to \fBraw\fP format, this option sets the "source
|
||||
serial" value in the header to the specified serial number. This is
|
||||
expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-m mode
|
||||
This option specifies whether MX records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are \fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and
|
||||
\fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-M mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-M mode
|
||||
This option checks whether a MX record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
\fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-n mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-n mode
|
||||
This option specifies whether NS records should be checked to see if they are
|
||||
addresses. Possible modes are \fBfail\fP (the default), \fBwarn\fP, and
|
||||
\fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-o filename\fP
|
||||
.B \-o filename
|
||||
This option writes the zone output to \fBfilename\fP\&. If \fBfilename\fP is \fB\-\fP, then
|
||||
the zone output is written to standard output. This is mandatory for \fBnamed\-compilezone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-r mode
|
||||
This option checks for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are
|
||||
semantically equal in plain DNS. Possible modes are \fBfail\fP,
|
||||
\fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s style\fP
|
||||
.B \-s style
|
||||
This option specifies the style of the dumped zone file. Possible styles are
|
||||
\fBfull\fP (the default) and \fBrelative\fP\&. The \fBfull\fP format is most
|
||||
suitable for processing automatically by a separate script.
|
||||
The relative format is more human\-readable and is thus
|
||||
suitable for editing by hand.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-S mode
|
||||
This option checks whether an SRV record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
|
||||
\fBfail\fP, \fBwarn\fP (the default), and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-t directory
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to chroot to \fBdirectory\fP, so that \fBinclude\fP directives in the
|
||||
configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
|
||||
\fBnamed\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-T mode
|
||||
This option checks whether Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a
|
||||
warning if an SPF\-formatted TXT record is not also present. Possible
|
||||
modes are \fBwarn\fP (the default) and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-w directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-w directory
|
||||
This option instructs \fBnamed\fP to chdir to \fBdirectory\fP, so that relative filenames in master file
|
||||
\fB$INCLUDE\fP directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
|
||||
\fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D\fP
|
||||
.B \-D
|
||||
This option dumps the zone file in canonical format. This is always enabled for
|
||||
\fBnamed\-compilezone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-W mode\fP
|
||||
.B \-W mode
|
||||
This option specifies whether to check for non\-terminal wildcards. Non\-terminal
|
||||
wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the
|
||||
wildcard matching algorithm (\fI\%RFC 4592\fP). Possible modes are \fBwarn\fP
|
||||
(the default) and \fBignore\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBzonename\fP
|
||||
.B zonename
|
||||
This indicates the domain name of the zone being checked.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBfilename\fP
|
||||
.B filename
|
||||
This is the name of the zone file.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ version of BIND to an older version.
|
|||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBfilename\fP
|
||||
.B filename
|
||||
This is the name of the \fB\&.nzd\fP file whose contents should be printed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,22 +40,30 @@ input and checks whether it is syntactically correct.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints out the help menu.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-o origin\fP
|
||||
.B \-o origin
|
||||
This option specifies the origin to be used when interpreting
|
||||
the record.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p\fP
|
||||
.B \-p
|
||||
This option prints out the resulting record in canonical form. If there
|
||||
is no canonical form defined, the record is printed in unknown
|
||||
record format.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u\fP
|
||||
.B \-u
|
||||
This option prints out the resulting record in unknown record form.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP, \fB\-T\fP, and \fB\-P\fP
|
||||
.B \-C, \-T, \-P
|
||||
These options print out the known class, standard type,
|
||||
and private type mnemonics, respectively.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -45,47 +45,65 @@ listens for queries.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to use only IPv4, even if the host machine is capable of IPv6. \fB\-4\fP and
|
||||
\fB\-6\fP are mutually exclusive.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to use only IPv6, even if the host machine is capable of IPv4. \fB\-4\fP and
|
||||
\fB\-6\fP are mutually exclusive.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c config\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-c config\-file
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to use \fBconfig\-file\fP as its configuration file instead of the default,
|
||||
\fB@sysconfdir@/named.conf\fP\&. To ensure that the configuration file
|
||||
can be reloaded after the server has changed its working directory
|
||||
due to to a possible \fBdirectory\fP option in the configuration file,
|
||||
\fBconfig\-file\fP should be an absolute pathname.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d debug\-level\fP
|
||||
.B \-d debug\-level
|
||||
This option sets the daemon\(aqs debug level to \fBdebug\-level\fP\&. Debugging traces from
|
||||
\fBnamed\fP become more verbose as the debug level increases.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D string\fP
|
||||
.B \-D string
|
||||
This option specifies a string that is used to identify a instance of \fBnamed\fP
|
||||
in a process listing. The contents of \fBstring\fP are not examined.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-E engine\-name\fP
|
||||
.B \-E engine\-name
|
||||
When applicable, this option specifies the hardware to use for cryptographic
|
||||
operations, such as a secure key store used for signing.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When BIND 9 is built with OpenSSL, this needs to be set to the OpenSSL
|
||||
engine identifier that drives the cryptographic accelerator or
|
||||
hardware service module (usually \fBpkcs11\fP).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-f\fP
|
||||
.B \-f
|
||||
This option runs the server in the foreground (i.e., do not daemonize).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-g\fP
|
||||
.B \-g
|
||||
This option runs the server in the foreground and forces all logging to \fBstderr\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L logfile\fP
|
||||
.B \-L logfile
|
||||
This option sets the log to the file \fBlogfile\fP by default, instead of the system log.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-M option\fP
|
||||
.B \-M option
|
||||
This option sets the default memory context options. If set to \fBexternal\fP,
|
||||
the internal memory manager is bypassed in favor of
|
||||
system\-provided memory allocation functions. If set to \fBfill\fP, blocks
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,19 +111,25 @@ of memory are filled with tag values when allocated or freed, to
|
|||
assist debugging of memory problems. \fBnofill\fP disables this behavior,
|
||||
and is the default unless \fBnamed\fP has been compiled with developer
|
||||
options.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-m flag\fP
|
||||
.B \-m flag
|
||||
This option turns on memory usage debugging flags. Possible flags are \fBusage\fP,
|
||||
\fBtrace\fP, \fBrecord\fP, \fBsize\fP, and \fBmctx\fP\&. These correspond to the
|
||||
\fBISC_MEM_DEBUGXXXX\fP flags described in \fB<isc/mem.h>\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-n #cpus\fP
|
||||
.B \-n #cpus
|
||||
This option creates \fB#cpus\fP worker threads to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If
|
||||
not specified, \fBnamed\fP tries to determine the number of CPUs
|
||||
present and creates one thread per CPU. If it is unable to determine
|
||||
the number of CPUs, a single worker thread is created.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p value\fP
|
||||
.B \-p value
|
||||
This option specifies the port(s) on which the server will listen
|
||||
for queries. If \fBvalue\fP is of the form \fB<portnum>\fP or
|
||||
\fBdns=<portnum>\fP, the server will listen for DNS queries on
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,8 +140,10 @@ If \fBvalue\fP is of the form \fBhttps=<portnum>\fP, the server will
|
|||
listen for HTTPS queries on \fBportnum\fP; the default is 443.
|
||||
If \fBvalue\fP is of the form \fBhttp=<portnum>\fP, the server will
|
||||
listen for HTTP queries on \fBportnum\fP; the default is 80.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s\fP
|
||||
.B \-s
|
||||
This option writes memory usage statistics to \fBstdout\fP on exit.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,7 +156,7 @@ removed or changed in a future release.
|
|||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-S #max\-socks\fP
|
||||
.B \-S #max\-socks
|
||||
This option is deprecated and no longer has any function.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -150,7 +176,7 @@ for its internal use.
|
|||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t directory\fP
|
||||
.B \-t directory
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP to chroot to \fBdirectory\fP after processing the command\-line arguments, but
|
||||
before reading the configuration file.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
@ -166,7 +192,7 @@ with root privileges to escape a chroot jail.
|
|||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-U #listeners\fP
|
||||
.B \-U #listeners
|
||||
This option tells \fBnamed\fP the number of \fB#listeners\fP worker threads to listen on, for incoming UDP packets on
|
||||
each address. If not specified, \fBnamed\fP calculates a default
|
||||
value based on the number of detected CPUs: 1 for 1 CPU, and the
|
||||
|
|
@ -175,8 +201,10 @@ This cannot be increased to a value higher than the number of CPUs.
|
|||
If \fB\-n\fP has been set to a higher value than the number of detected
|
||||
CPUs, then \fB\-U\fP may be increased as high as that value, but no
|
||||
higher.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u user\fP
|
||||
.B \-u user
|
||||
This option sets the setuid to \fBuser\fP after completing privileged operations, such as
|
||||
creating sockets that listen on privileged ports.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
|
|
@ -195,13 +223,17 @@ previous kernels did not allow privileges to be retained after
|
|||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option reports the version number and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option reports the version number and build options, and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-X lock\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-X lock\-file
|
||||
This option acquires a lock on the specified file at runtime; this helps to
|
||||
prevent duplicate \fBnamed\fP instances from running simultaneously.
|
||||
Use of this option overrides the \fBlock\-file\fP option in
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -49,22 +49,30 @@ into a command line to confirm the correctness of an NSEC3 hash.
|
|||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBsalt\fP
|
||||
.B salt
|
||||
This is the salt provided to the hash algorithm.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBalgorithm\fP
|
||||
.B algorithm
|
||||
This is a number indicating the hash algorithm. Currently the only supported
|
||||
hash algorithm for NSEC3 is SHA\-1, which is indicated by the number
|
||||
1; consequently "1" is the only useful value for this argument.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBflags\fP
|
||||
.B flags
|
||||
This is provided for compatibility with NSEC3 record presentation format, but
|
||||
is ignored since the flags do not affect the hash.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBiterations\fP
|
||||
.B iterations
|
||||
This is the number of additional times the hash should be performed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBdomain\fP
|
||||
.B domain
|
||||
This is the domain name to be hashed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -73,26 +73,38 @@ used by Windows 2000 can be switched on with the \fB\-o\fP flag.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option sets use of IPv4 only.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option sets use of IPv6 only.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-C\fP
|
||||
.B \-C
|
||||
Overrides the default \fIresolv.conf\fP file. This is only intended for testing.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-d\fP
|
||||
.B \-d
|
||||
This option sets debug mode, which provides tracing information about the update
|
||||
requests that are made and the replies received from the name server.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-D\fP
|
||||
.B \-D
|
||||
This option sets extra debug mode.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-i\fP
|
||||
.B \-i
|
||||
This option forces interactive mode, even when standard input is not a terminal.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k keyfile\fP
|
||||
.B \-k keyfile
|
||||
This option indicates the file containing the TSIG authentication key. Keyfiles may be in
|
||||
two formats: a single file containing a \fBnamed.conf\fP\-format \fBkey\fP
|
||||
statement, which may be generated automatically by \fBddns\-confgen\fP;
|
||||
|
|
@ -102,8 +114,10 @@ or a pair of files whose names are of the format
|
|||
\fBdnssec\-keygen\fP\&. The \fB\-k\fP option can also be used to specify a SIG(0)
|
||||
key used to authenticate Dynamic DNS update requests. In this case,
|
||||
the key specified is not an HMAC\-MD5 key.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-l\fP
|
||||
.B \-l
|
||||
This option sets local\-host only mode, which sets the server address to localhost
|
||||
(disabling the \fBserver\fP so that the server address cannot be
|
||||
overridden). Connections to the local server use a TSIG key
|
||||
|
|
@ -111,27 +125,39 @@ found in \fB@runstatedir@/session.key\fP, which is automatically
|
|||
generated by \fBnamed\fP if any local \fBprimary\fP zone has set
|
||||
\fBupdate\-policy\fP to \fBlocal\fP\&. The location of this key file can be
|
||||
overridden with the \fB\-k\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-L level\fP
|
||||
.B \-L level
|
||||
This option sets the logging debug level. If zero, logging is disabled.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port
|
||||
This option sets the port to use for connections to a name server. The default is
|
||||
53.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-P\fP
|
||||
.B \-P
|
||||
This option prints the list of private BIND\-specific resource record types whose
|
||||
format is understood by \fBnsupdate\fP\&. See also the \fB\-T\fP option.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r udpretries\fP
|
||||
.B \-r udpretries
|
||||
This option sets the number of UDP retries. The default is 3. If zero, only one update
|
||||
request is made.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t timeout\fP
|
||||
.B \-t timeout
|
||||
This option sets the maximum time an update request can take before it is aborted. The
|
||||
default is 300 seconds. If zero, the timeout is disabled.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-T\fP
|
||||
.B \-T
|
||||
This option prints the list of IANA standard resource record types whose format is
|
||||
understood by \fBnsupdate\fP\&. \fBnsupdate\fP exits after the lists
|
||||
are printed. The \fB\-T\fP option can be combined with the \fB\-P\fP
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,22 +167,30 @@ Other types can be entered using \fBTYPEXXXXX\fP where \fBXXXXX\fP is the
|
|||
decimal value of the type with no leading zeros. The rdata, if
|
||||
present, is parsed using the UNKNOWN rdata format, (<backslash>
|
||||
<hash> <space> <length> <space> <hexstring>).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u udptimeout\fP
|
||||
.B \-u udptimeout
|
||||
This option sets the UDP retry interval. The default is 3 seconds. If zero, the
|
||||
interval is computed from the timeout interval and number of UDP
|
||||
retries.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-v\fP
|
||||
.B \-v
|
||||
This option specifies that TCP should be used even for small update requests. By default, \fBnsupdate\fP uses
|
||||
UDP to send update requests to the name server unless they are too
|
||||
large to fit in a UDP request, in which case TCP is used. TCP may
|
||||
be preferable when a batch of update requests is made.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option prints the version number and exits.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-y [hmac:]keyname:secret\fP
|
||||
.B \-y [hmac:]keyname:secret
|
||||
This option sets the literal TSIG authentication key. \fBkeyname\fP is the name of the key,
|
||||
and \fBsecret\fP is the base64 encoded shared secret. \fBhmac\fP is the
|
||||
name of the key algorithm; valid choices are \fBhmac\-md5\fP,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ by hand. Alternatively, it can be run with the \fB\-a\fP option to set up a
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a\fP
|
||||
.B \-a
|
||||
This option sets automatic \fBrndc\fP configuration, which creates a file
|
||||
\fB@sysconfdir@/rndc.key\fP that is read by both \fBrndc\fP and \fBnamed\fP on startup.
|
||||
The \fBrndc.key\fP file defines a default command channel and
|
||||
|
|
@ -55,47 +55,67 @@ If a more elaborate configuration than that generated by
|
|||
\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fP is required, for example if rndc is to be used
|
||||
remotely, run \fBrndc\-confgen\fP without the \fB\-a\fP option
|
||||
and set up \fBrndc.conf\fP and \fBnamed.conf\fP as directed.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-A algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-A algorithm
|
||||
This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available choices
|
||||
are: hmac\-md5, hmac\-sha1, hmac\-sha224, hmac\-sha256, hmac\-sha384, and
|
||||
hmac\-sha512. The default is hmac\-sha256.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-b keysize\fP
|
||||
.B \-b keysize
|
||||
This option specifies the size of the authentication key in bits. The size must be between
|
||||
1 and 512 bits; the default is the hash size.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c keyfile\fP
|
||||
.B \-c keyfile
|
||||
This option is used with the \fB\-a\fP option to specify an alternate location for
|
||||
\fBrndc.key\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
|
||||
\fBrndc\-confgen\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k keyname\fP
|
||||
.B \-k keyname
|
||||
This option specifies the key name of the \fBrndc\fP authentication key. This must be a
|
||||
valid domain name. The default is \fBrndc\-key\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port
|
||||
This option specifies the command channel port where \fBnamed\fP listens for
|
||||
connections from \fBrndc\fP\&. The default is 953.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option prevets printing the written path in automatic configuration mode.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s address\fP
|
||||
.B \-s address
|
||||
This option specifies the IP address where \fBnamed\fP listens for command\-channel
|
||||
connections from \fBrndc\fP\&. The default is the loopback address
|
||||
127.0.0.1.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-t chrootdir\fP
|
||||
.B \-t chrootdir
|
||||
This option is used with the \fB\-a\fP option to specify a directory where \fBnamed\fP
|
||||
runs chrooted. An additional copy of the \fBrndc.key\fP is
|
||||
written relative to this directory, so that it is found by the
|
||||
chrooted \fBnamed\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-u user\fP
|
||||
.B \-u user
|
||||
This option is used with the \fB\-a\fP option to set the owner of the generated \fBrndc.key\fP file.
|
||||
If \fB\-t\fP is also specified, only the file in the chroot
|
||||
area has its owner changed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
206
doc/man/rndc.8in
206
doc/man/rndc.8in
|
|
@ -56,51 +56,71 @@ server and decide what algorithm and key it should use.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-4\fP
|
||||
.B \-4
|
||||
This option indicates use of IPv4 only.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-6\fP
|
||||
.B \-6
|
||||
This option indicates use of IPv6 only.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-b source\-address\fP
|
||||
.B \-b source\-address
|
||||
This option indicates \fBsource\-address\fP as the source address for the connection to the
|
||||
server. Multiple instances are permitted, to allow setting of both the
|
||||
IPv4 and IPv6 source addresses.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-c config\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-c config\-file
|
||||
This option indicates \fBconfig\-file\fP as the configuration file instead of the default,
|
||||
\fB@sysconfdir@/rndc.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-k key\-file\fP
|
||||
.B \-k key\-file
|
||||
This option indicates \fBkey\-file\fP as the key file instead of the default,
|
||||
\fB@sysconfdir@/rndc.key\fP\&. The key in \fB@sysconfdir@/rndc.key\fP is used to
|
||||
authenticate commands sent to the server if the config\-file does not
|
||||
exist.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-s server\fP
|
||||
.B \-s server
|
||||
\fBserver\fP is the name or address of the server which matches a server
|
||||
statement in the configuration file for \fBrndc\fP\&. If no server is
|
||||
supplied on the command line, the host named by the default\-server
|
||||
clause in the options statement of the \fBrndc\fP configuration file
|
||||
is used.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-p port\fP
|
||||
.B \-p port
|
||||
This option instructs BIND 9 to send commands to TCP port \fBport\fP instead of its default control
|
||||
channel port, 953.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-q\fP
|
||||
.B \-q
|
||||
This option sets quiet mode, where message text returned by the server is not printed
|
||||
unless there is an error.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-r\fP
|
||||
.B \-r
|
||||
This option instructs \fBrndc\fP to print the result code returned by \fBnamed\fP
|
||||
after executing the requested command (e.g., ISC_R_SUCCESS,
|
||||
ISC_R_FAILURE, etc.).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-V\fP
|
||||
.B \-V
|
||||
This option enables verbose logging.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-y key_id\fP
|
||||
.B \-y key_id
|
||||
This option indicates use of the key \fBkey_id\fP from the configuration file. For control message validation to succeed, \fBkey_id\fP must be known
|
||||
by \fBnamed\fP with the same algorithm and secret string. If no \fBkey_id\fP is specified,
|
||||
\fBrndc\fP first looks for a key clause in the server statement of
|
||||
|
|
@ -118,7 +138,7 @@ without arguments.
|
|||
Currently supported commands are:
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBaddzone\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]] \fIconfiguration\fP
|
||||
.B addzone zone [class [view]] configuration
|
||||
This command adds a zone while the server is running. This command requires the
|
||||
\fBallow\-new\-zones\fP option to be set to \fByes\fP\&. The configuration
|
||||
string specified on the command line is the zone configuration text
|
||||
|
|
@ -142,8 +162,10 @@ the default view:
|
|||
text.)
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc delzone\fP and \fBrndc modzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBdelzone\fP [\fB\-clean\fP] \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B delzone [\-clean] zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command deletes a zone while the server is running.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
If the \fB\-clean\fP argument is specified, the zone\(aqs master file (and
|
||||
|
|
@ -160,8 +182,10 @@ recreated. To remove it permanently, it must also be removed from
|
|||
\fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc addzone\fP and \fBrndc modzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBdnssec\fP ( \fB\-status\fP | \fB\-rollover\fP \fB\-key\fP id [\fB\-alg\fP \fIalgorithm\fP] [\fB\-when\fP \fItime\fP] | \fB\-checkds\fP [\fB\-key\fP \fIid\fP [\fB\-alg\fP \fIalgorithm\fP]] [\fB\-when\fP \fItime\fP] ( \fIpublished\fP | \fIwithdrawn\fP )) \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B dnssec (\-status | \-rollover \-key id [\-alg algorithm] [\-when time] | \-checkds [\-key id [\-alg algorithm]] [\-when time] published | withdraw)) zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command allows you to interact with the "dnssec\-policy" of a given
|
||||
zone.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -179,8 +203,10 @@ is only one key acting as a KSK in the zone, assume the DS of that key (if
|
|||
there are multiple keys with the same tag, use \fB\-alg algorithm\fP to
|
||||
select the correct algorithm). The time that the DS has been published or
|
||||
withdrawn is set to now, unless otherwise specified with the argument \fB\-when time\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBdnstap\fP ( \fB\-reopen\fP | \fB\-roll\fP [\fInumber\fP] )
|
||||
.B dnstap (\-reopen | \-roll [number])
|
||||
This command closes and re\-opens DNSTAP output files. \fBrndc dnstap \-reopen\fP allows
|
||||
the output file to be renamed externally, so that \fBnamed\fP can
|
||||
truncate and re\-open it. \fBrndc dnstap \-roll\fP causes the output file
|
||||
|
|
@ -188,26 +214,36 @@ to be rolled automatically, similar to log files. The most recent
|
|||
output file has ".0" appended to its name; the previous most recent
|
||||
output file is moved to ".1", and so on. If \fBnumber\fP is specified, then
|
||||
the number of backup log files is limited to that number.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBdumpdb\fP [\fB\-all\fP | \fB\-cache\fP | \fB\-zones\fP | \fB\-adb\fP | \fB\-bad\fP | \fB\-expired\fP | \fB\-fail\fP] [\fIview ...\fP]
|
||||
.B dumpdb [\-all | \-cache | \-zones | \-adb | \-bad | \-expired | \-fail] [view ...]
|
||||
This command dumps the server\(aqs caches (default) and/or zones to the dump file for
|
||||
the specified views. If no view is specified, all views are dumped.
|
||||
(See the \fBdump\-file\fP option in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
|
||||
Manual.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBflush\fP
|
||||
.B flush
|
||||
This command flushes the server\(aqs cache.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBflushname\fP \fIname\fP [\fIview\fP]
|
||||
.B flushname name [view]
|
||||
This command flushes the given name from the view\(aqs DNS cache and, if applicable,
|
||||
from the view\(aqs nameserver address database, bad server cache, and
|
||||
SERVFAIL cache.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBflushtree\fP \fIname\fP [\fIview\fP]
|
||||
.B flushtree name [view]
|
||||
This command flushes the given name, and all of its subdomains, from the view\(aqs
|
||||
DNS cache, address database, bad server cache, and SERVFAIL cache.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBfreeze\fP [\fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]]
|
||||
.B freeze [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
This command suspends updates to a dynamic zone. If no zone is specified, then all
|
||||
zones are suspended. This allows manual edits to be made to a zone
|
||||
normally updated by dynamic update, and causes changes in the
|
||||
|
|
@ -215,8 +251,10 @@ journal file to be synced into the master file. All dynamic update
|
|||
attempts are refused while the zone is frozen.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc thaw\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBhalt\fP [\fB\-p\fP]
|
||||
.B halt [\-p]
|
||||
This command stops the server immediately. Recent changes made through dynamic
|
||||
update or IXFR are not saved to the master files, but are rolled
|
||||
forward from the journal files when the server is restarted. If
|
||||
|
|
@ -225,8 +263,10 @@ an external process to determine when \fBnamed\fP has completed
|
|||
halting.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc stop\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBloadkeys\fP [\fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]]
|
||||
.B loadkeys [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
This command fetches all DNSSEC keys for the given zone from the key directory. If
|
||||
they are within their publication period, they are merged into the
|
||||
zone\(aqs DNSKEY RRset. Unlike \fBrndc sign\fP, however, the zone is not
|
||||
|
|
@ -237,8 +277,10 @@ This command requires that the zone be configured with a \fBdnssec\-policy\fP, o
|
|||
that the \fBauto\-dnssec\fP zone option be set to \fBmaintain\fP, and also requires the
|
||||
zone to be configured to allow dynamic DNS. (See "Dynamic Update Policies" in
|
||||
the Administrator Reference Manual for more details.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBmanaged\-keys\fP (\fIstatus\fP | \fIrefresh\fP | \fIsync\fP | \fIdestroy\fP) [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B managed\-keys (status | refresh | sync | destroy) [class [view]]
|
||||
This command inspects and controls the "managed\-keys" database which handles
|
||||
\fI\%RFC 5011\fP DNSSEC trust anchor maintenance. If a view is specified, these
|
||||
commands are applied to that view; otherwise, they are applied to all
|
||||
|
|
@ -277,8 +319,10 @@ also be used, for example, to jumpstart the acquisition of new
|
|||
keys in the event of a trust anchor rollover, or as a brute\-force
|
||||
repair for key maintenance problems.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBmodzone\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]] \fIconfiguration\fP
|
||||
.B modzone zone [class [view]] configuration
|
||||
This command modifies the configuration of a zone while the server is running. This
|
||||
command requires the \fBallow\-new\-zones\fP option to be set to \fByes\fP\&.
|
||||
As with \fBaddzone\fP, the configuration string specified on the
|
||||
|
|
@ -295,16 +339,22 @@ make the changes permanent, it must also be modified in
|
|||
\fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc addzone\fP and \fBrndc delzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBnotify\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B notify zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command resends NOTIFY messages for the zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBnotrace\fP
|
||||
.B notrace
|
||||
This command sets the server\(aqs debugging level to 0.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc trace\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBnta\fP [( \fB\-class\fP \fIclass\fP | \fB\-dump\fP | \fB\-force\fP | \fB\-remove\fP | \fB\-lifetime\fP \fIduration\fP)] \fIdomain\fP [\fIview\fP]
|
||||
.B nta [(\-class class | \-dump | \-force | \-remove | \-lifetime duration)] domain [view]
|
||||
This command sets a DNSSEC negative trust anchor (NTA) for \fBdomain\fP, with a
|
||||
lifetime of \fBduration\fP\&. The default lifetime is configured in
|
||||
\fBnamed.conf\fP via the \fBnta\-lifetime\fP option, and defaults to one
|
||||
|
|
@ -354,8 +404,10 @@ All of these options can be shortened, i.e., to \fB\-l\fP, \fB\-r\fP,
|
|||
Unrecognized options are treated as errors. To refer to a domain or
|
||||
view name that begins with a hyphen, use a double\-hyphen (\-\-) on the
|
||||
command line to indicate the end of options.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBquerylog\fP [(\fIon\fP | \fIoff\fP)]
|
||||
.B querylog [(on | off)]
|
||||
This command enables or disables query logging. For backward compatibility, this
|
||||
command can also be used without an argument to toggle query logging
|
||||
on and off.
|
||||
|
|
@ -364,14 +416,18 @@ Query logging can also be enabled by explicitly directing the
|
|||
\fBqueries\fP \fBcategory\fP to a \fBchannel\fP in the \fBlogging\fP section
|
||||
of \fBnamed.conf\fP, or by specifying \fBquerylog yes;\fP in the
|
||||
\fBoptions\fP section of \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBreconfig\fP
|
||||
.B reconfig
|
||||
This command reloads the configuration file and loads new zones, but does not reload
|
||||
existing zone files even if they have changed. This is faster than a
|
||||
full \fBreload\fP when there is a large number of zones, because it
|
||||
avoids the need to examine the modification times of the zone files.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBrecursing\fP
|
||||
.B recursing
|
||||
This command dumps the list of queries \fBnamed\fP is currently
|
||||
recursing on, and the list of domains to which iterative queries
|
||||
are currently being sent.
|
||||
|
|
@ -390,30 +446,42 @@ cumulative over time; whenever the number of active fetches for
|
|||
a domain drops to zero, the counter for that domain is deleted,
|
||||
and the next time a fetch is sent to that domain, it is recreated
|
||||
with the counters set to zero).
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBrefresh\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B refresh zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command schedules zone maintenance for the given zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBreload\fP
|
||||
.B reload
|
||||
This command reloads the configuration file and zones.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBreload\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B reload zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command reloads the given zone.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBretransfer\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B retransfer zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command retransfers the given secondary zone from the primary server.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
If the zone is configured to use \fBinline\-signing\fP, the signed
|
||||
version of the zone is discarded; after the retransfer of the
|
||||
unsigned version is complete, the signed version is regenerated
|
||||
with new signatures.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBscan\fP
|
||||
.B scan
|
||||
This command scans the list of available network interfaces for changes, without
|
||||
performing a full \fBreconfig\fP or waiting for the
|
||||
\fBinterface\-interval\fP timer.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBsecroots\fP [\fB\-\fP] [\fIview\fP ...]
|
||||
.B secroots [\-] [view ...]
|
||||
This command dumps the security roots (i.e., trust anchors configured via
|
||||
\fBtrust\-anchors\fP, or the \fBmanaged\-keys\fP or \fBtrusted\-keys\fP statements
|
||||
[both deprecated], or \fBdnssec\-validation auto\fP) and negative trust anchors
|
||||
|
|
@ -429,8 +497,10 @@ Otherwise, it is written to the secroots dump file, which defaults to
|
|||
option in \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc managed\-keys\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBserve\-stale\fP (\fBon\fP | \fBoff\fP | \fBreset\fP | \fBstatus\fP) [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B serve\-stale (on | off | reset | status) [class [view]]
|
||||
This command enables, disables, resets, or reports the current status of
|
||||
the serving of stale answers as configured in \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
|
|
@ -441,13 +511,17 @@ serve\-stale reset\fP restores the setting as configured in \fBnamed.conf\fP\&.
|
|||
\fBrndc serve\-stale status\fP reports whether caching and serving of stale
|
||||
answers is currently enabled or disabled. It also reports the values of
|
||||
\fBstale\-answer\-ttl\fP and \fBmax\-stale\-ttl\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBshowzone\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B showzone zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command prints the configuration of a running zone.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc zonestatus\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBsign\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B sign zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command fetches all DNSSEC keys for the given zone from the key directory (see
|
||||
the \fBkey\-directory\fP option in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
|
||||
Manual). If they are within their publication period, they are merged into
|
||||
|
|
@ -461,8 +535,10 @@ and also requires the zone to be configured to allow dynamic DNS. (See
|
|||
details.)
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc loadkeys\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBsigning\fP [(\fB\-list\fP | \fB\-clear\fP \fIkeyid/algorithm\fP | \fB\-clear\fP \fIall\fP | \fB\-nsec3param\fP ( \fIparameters\fP | none ) | \fB\-serial\fP \fIvalue\fP ) \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B signing [(\-list | \-clear keyid/algorithm | \-clear all | \-nsec3param (parameters | none) | \-serial value) zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command lists, edits, or removes the DNSSEC signing\-state records for the
|
||||
specified zone. The status of ongoing DNSSEC operations, such as
|
||||
signing or generating NSEC3 chains, is stored in the zone in the form
|
||||
|
|
@ -506,18 +582,24 @@ replaces it with NSEC.
|
|||
\fBvalue\fP\&. If the value would cause the serial number to go backwards, it
|
||||
is rejected. The primary use of this parameter is to set the serial number on inline
|
||||
signed zones.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBstats\fP
|
||||
.B stats
|
||||
This command writes server statistics to the statistics file. (See the
|
||||
\fBstatistics\-file\fP option in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
|
||||
Manual.)
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBstatus\fP
|
||||
.B status
|
||||
This command displays the status of the server. Note that the number of zones includes
|
||||
the internal \fBbind/CH\fP zone and the default \fB\&./IN\fP hint zone, if
|
||||
there is no explicit root zone configured.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBstop\fP \fB\-p\fP
|
||||
.B stop \-p
|
||||
This command stops the server, making sure any recent changes made through dynamic
|
||||
update or IXFR are first saved to the master files of the updated
|
||||
zones. If \fB\-p\fP is specified, \fBnamed(8)\(ga\(aqs process ID is returned.
|
||||
|
|
@ -525,13 +607,17 @@ This allows an external process to determine when \(ga\(ganamed\fP has
|
|||
completed stopping.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc halt\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBsync\fP \fB\-clean\fP [\fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]]
|
||||
.B sync \-clean [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
This command syncs changes in the journal file for a dynamic zone to the master
|
||||
file. If the "\-clean" option is specified, the journal file is also
|
||||
removed. If no zone is specified, then all zones are synced.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtcp\-timeouts\fP [\fIinitial\fP \fIidle\fP \fIkeepalive\fP \fIadvertised\fP]
|
||||
.B tcp\-timeouts [initial idle keepalive advertised]
|
||||
When called without arguments, this command displays the current values of the
|
||||
\fBtcp\-initial\-timeout\fP, \fBtcp\-idle\-timeout\fP,
|
||||
\fBtcp\-keepalive\-timeout\fP, and \fBtcp\-advertised\-timeout\fP options.
|
||||
|
|
@ -539,8 +625,10 @@ When called with arguments, these values are updated. This allows an
|
|||
administrator to make rapid adjustments when under a
|
||||
denial\-of\-service (DoS) attack. See the descriptions of these options in the BIND 9
|
||||
Administrator Reference Manual for details of their use.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBthaw\fP [\fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]]
|
||||
.B thaw [zone [class [view]]]
|
||||
This command enables updates to a frozen dynamic zone. If no zone is specified,
|
||||
then all frozen zones are enabled. This causes the server to reload
|
||||
the zone from disk, and re\-enables dynamic updates after the load has
|
||||
|
|
@ -551,32 +639,44 @@ changes in the zone. Otherwise, if the zone has changed, any existing
|
|||
journal file is removed.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc freeze\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtrace\fP
|
||||
.B trace
|
||||
This command increments the server\(aqs debugging level by one.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtrace\fP \fIlevel\fP
|
||||
.B trace level
|
||||
This command sets the server\(aqs debugging level to an explicit value.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
See also \fBrndc notrace\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtsig\-delete\fP \fIkeyname\fP [\fIview\fP]
|
||||
.B tsig\-delete keyname [view]
|
||||
This command deletes a given TKEY\-negotiated key from the server. This does not
|
||||
apply to statically configured TSIG keys.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBtsig\-list\fP
|
||||
.B tsig\-list
|
||||
This command lists the names of all TSIG keys currently configured for use by
|
||||
\fBnamed\fP in each view. The list includes both statically configured keys and
|
||||
dynamic TKEY\-negotiated keys.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fBvalidation\fP (\fBon\fP | \fBoff\fP | \fBstatus\fP) [\fIview\fP ...]\(ga\(ga
|
||||
.B validation (on | off | status) [view ...]
|
||||
This command enables, disables, or checks the current status of DNSSEC validation. By
|
||||
default, validation is enabled.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The cache is flushed when validation is turned on or off to avoid using data
|
||||
that might differ between states.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fBzonestatus\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIclass\fP [\fIview\fP]]
|
||||
.B zonestatus zone [class [view]]
|
||||
This command displays the current status of the given zone, including the master
|
||||
file name and any include files from which it was loaded, when it was
|
||||
most recently loaded, the current serial number, the number of nodes,
|
||||
|
|
@ -587,7 +687,7 @@ signing, and the scheduled refresh or expiry times for the zone.
|
|||
See also \fBrndc showzone\fP\&.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\fBrndc\fP commands that specify zone names, such as \fBreload\fP,
|
||||
\fBrndc\fP commands that specify zone names, such as \fBreload\fP
|
||||
\fBretransfer\fP, or \fBzonestatus\fP, can be ambiguous when applied to zones
|
||||
of type \fBredirect\fP\&. Redirect zones are always called \fB\&.\fP, and can be
|
||||
confused with zones of type \fBhint\fP or with secondary copies of the root
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -44,13 +44,15 @@ of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is \fBtsig\-key\fP\&.
|
|||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-a algorithm\fP
|
||||
.B \-a algorithm
|
||||
This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available
|
||||
choices are: hmac\-md5, hmac\-sha1, hmac\-sha224, hmac\-sha256, hmac\-sha384,
|
||||
and hmac\-sha512. The default is hmac\-sha256. Options are
|
||||
case\-insensitive, and the "hmac\-" prefix may be omitted.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.INDENT 0.0
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.B \fB\-h\fP
|
||||
.B \-h
|
||||
This option prints a short summary of options and arguments.
|
||||
.UNINDENT
|
||||
.SH SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
Loading…
Reference in a new issue